m 


'-Ky      j>- 


ALIFOfo 


l>o 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


.%. 


BY 


LYBA 


AND  JNIITA  SHEFFIELD  27812 


^ 


COPYRIGHT.  192G 

HY 

LVBA  AND  NITA  SHEFFIELD 

All  RiJits  Reserved 
Published  May,  192(i 


THE  HICKS-JUDD  COMPANY.  Printers 
GRAPHIC  ARTS  ENGRAVING  CO. 


/ 


DEDICATION 

Our  simplified  swimming  text  we  dedicate  to  you, 
Beginner,  swimmer,  and  teacher,  too. 


/ 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


INTRODUCTION 

The  purpose  of  this  text  1)ook  is  to  simplify  the  learning  and  teach- 
ing of  swimming  from  a  scientific  point  of  view.  Our  further  objective 
has  been  to  arrange  a  series  of  lessons  in  their  logical  progression  to 
meet  the  demands  of  schools,  playgrounds,  clubs,  and  aquatic  centers. 
The  text  has  been  graduated  to  serve  the  needs  of  beginners  and  swim- 
mers, and  a  special  section  upon  the  method  of  procedure  for  mass 
instruction  and  class  management  has  been  arranged  for  teachers  of 
swimming.  We  have  avoided  a  detailed  and  technical  analysis  of  all 
swimming  strokes,  featuring  only  the  fundamental  ones  necessary  in 
the  logical  progression  of  swimming. 

A  lengthy  dissertation  might  be  written  regarding  the  values  of 
swimming.  However,  it  is  sufficient  to  state  that  it  is  one  of  the 
most  popular  and  pleasurable  of  athletic  activities;  from  a  physiologi- 
cal standpoint  it  is  one  of  the  most  healthful  exercises  for  developing 
the  body  symmetricall}^;  swimming  is  necessary  from  a  utilitarian 
standpoint  because  it  serves  as  a  means  of  saving  life, 

A  swimming  and  life-saving  test  should  be  one  of  the  graduation 
requirements  in  every  institution  of  learning  from  the  elementary 
through  the  advanced.  Instruction  should  not  be  limited  to  university 
students,  but  it  is  imperative  that  the  youth  receive  training  in  swim- 
ming and  in  life-saving.  The  leading  educators,  directors  of  physical 
education,  aquatic  authorities,  and  members  of  the  medical  profession 
realize  that  in  the  near  future  this  demand  must  be  met.  This  work 
is  truly  applied  physical  education. 

The  following  are  a  few  of  the  endorsements  on  "Swimming  Sim- 
plified" received  from  some  of  the  leading  educators  and  swimming 
authorities  : 

"In  my  opinion  your  book  deals  with  the  subject  in  a  most  scientific 
and  thorough  manner.  In  learning  to  swim  it  is  especially  important 
that  the  novice  gain  confidence  at  the  start.  Proper  control  of  the 
respiration  and  balance  are  essential  to  confidence  in  the  water.  Your 
plan  for  preliminary  instruction  in  these  matters  through  dry  land  and 
other  drills  and  your  careful  attention  to  the  laws  of  natural  progres- 
sion are  indicative  of  the  scientific  study  you  have  made  of  this  sport. 
Allow^  me  to  congratulate  you  and  your  sister  and  wish  you  the  suc- 
cess you  deserve  in  getting  your  book  before  the  public." 

Frank  Kleeberger, 
Director  of  Physical  Education, 

University  of  California. 


6  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

"I  have  read  the  Misses  Sheffield's  book  entitled  'Swimming  Simplified,' 
and  during  the  Summer  Session  of  the  University  of  California  I  ob- 
served Miss  Nita  Sheffield  give  instructions  in  swimming.  The  contents 
of  their  book  are  the  result  of  considerable  experience  in  swimming  and 
coaching  the  subject  to  individuals  and  classes.  The  book  is  arranged 
from  a  pedagogical  as  well  as  a  practical  standpoint,  and  contains  con- 
siderable material  for  advanced  swimmers  and  instructors,  yet  is  very 
simple  for  beginners.  It  should  be  in  every  physical  director's  library,  and 
in  the  hands  of  everyone  who  is  desirous  of  learning  to  swim,  or  of  im- 
proving his  strokes  and  success  in  water." 

A.  D.  Brown,  M.  D., 
Director  of  Physical  Education, 
University  of  California  Summer  Sessions. 
Director  of  Physical  Education, 

Stanford  University. 

"1  am  delighted  to  possess  your  publication,  'Swimming  Simplified,' 
which  I  believe  is  an  excellent  contribution  to  swimming.  The  three  parts 
which  deal  with  the"  actual  teaching  and  learning  of  swimming,  seem  to 
me  to  be  mighty  good." 

E.  B.  DeGroot, 
Director  of  Physical  Education, 
San  Francisco  Schools  and  Playgrounds, 
Boy  Scout  Executive,  Los  Angeles. 

"I  wish  to  express  my  appreciation  for  the  book,  'Swimming  Simpli- 
fied,' that  you  sent  to  me  some  time  ago.  I  have  looked  it  over  very 
carefully  and  have  compared  it  with  other  publications  on  this  subject, 
and  I  feel  that  it  is  the  best  of  its  kind  in  print.  You  have  organized  your 
material  in  a  most  satisfactory  way;  the  descriptions  and  directions  are  ^ 
very  clearly  stated ;  and  your  cuts  are  the  best  that  I  have  ever  seen  for 
this  subject.  Yovir  book  should  prove  a  most  valuable  help  for  teachers 
of  Physical  Education,  specialists  in  swimming,  and  for  individuals  who 
are  interested  in  perfecting  their  strokes." 

Miss  Ruth  Elliott, 
Lleod  of  Department  of  Physical  Education, 

University  of  California. 

"It  does,  indeed,  seem  that  you  and  your  sister  have  established  the  one 
simple,  straightforward  way  of  teaching  swimming.  I  have  noticed  you 
and  your  work  for  two  years  or  more  and  am  satisfied  that  you  are  good 
teachers  and  worthy  of  recommendation  as  such." 

Ben  J.  Ide  Wheeler, 
Former  President  of  the 
University  of  California. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  7 

"I  appreciate  the  copy  of  your  'Swimming  Simplified,'  written  by  yo'ir- 
self  and  your  sister.  I  remember  very  well  your  activity  here  at  the  Uni- 
versity and  once  had  the  pleasure  of  seeing  you  both  swim.  Your  book 
seems  to  me  a  most  practical  manual.  I  thoroughly  believe  in  swimming 
for  women.  It  is  one  sport  in  which  they  have  every  prospect  of  sur- 
passing men,  for  they  can  remain  longer  in  the  water  without  chill  and 
have  greater  buoyancy.  It  is  a  sport,  too,  which  women  can  indulge  in 
without  fear  of  suffering  bodily  harm,  one  that  develops  courage  and  char- 
acter, and  that  is  useful  in  the  highest  degree.  I  am  proud  of  the  fact 
that  all  three  of  my  daughters  swim,  and  I  wish  that  every  girl  might 
learn." 

David  P.  Barrow^s, 
President,  University  of  California. 

"I  have  read  'Swimming  Simplified'  carefully  three  or  four  times  and 
the  more  I  read  it  the  more  I  am  impressed  with  its  value.  Knowing 
your  well-established  ability  as  swimmers,  your  knowledge  of  girls  and 
how  to  discipline  them,  to  say  nothing  of  your  ability  to  impart  instruction 
in  swimming,  I  feel  assured  that  with  the  additional  study  of  this  book 
every  young  lady  in  San  Francisco  would  be  made  an  expert  swimmer 
in  a  short  while. 

"To  say  that  I  believe  in  swimming  for  girls  is  putting  it  mildly.  If  I 
had  my  way  I  would  have  included  it  in  the  school  curriculum  and  make 
it  obligatory  for  every  boy  and  girl  in  the  elementary  and  high  schools  to 
learn  swimming,  not  alone  on  account  of  its  pleasant  recreative  features, 
but  more  particularly  because  of  the  fact  that  it  is  such  a  health-giving 
sport." 

George  D.  Gallagher, 
President  Board  of  Education, 
City  and  County  of  San  Francisco. 

"I  wish  to  say  that  after  reading  the  contents  carefully,  I  noticed  that 
your  methods  of  instructions  are  very  well  laid  out.  Therefore  I  would 
hardly  give  any  criticisms,  and  an  edition  like  this  so  carefully  worked  out 
would  certainly  tend  to  enhance  the  success  of  the  coming  swimmers." 

H.  H.  Kruger, 
World's   Champion   Back   Stroke  Szvininier. 

"It  is  well  known  that  the  difficulties  of  teaching  swimming  by  written 
lessons  are  very  great,  as  actual  practice  proves  the  more  valuable.  How- 
ever, the  authors  of  this  book  have  set  forth  an  excellent  system  which 


8  SJVIMMIXG  SIMPLIFIED 

will  greatly  aid  the  swimmer  who  follows  it,  and  facilitate  his  progress. 
I  consider  'Swimming  Simplified'  the  best  condensed  form  that  has  been 
published."  E^j^^st  Braxdsten, 

Instructor  of  Szvimming, 
Stanford   University,  California. 

"A  new  science  of  swimming,  which  the  Sheffield  Sisters  hope  to  have 
taught  in  all"  schools,  was  responsible  for  the  remarkable  showing  made  by 
the  University  girls.  The  Sheffield  Sisters  both  hold  swimming  records. 
Both  have  swum  the  Golden  Gate.  They  are  also  experts  at  life  saving 
and  resuscitation.  They  had  advanced  pupils  in  diving  and  expert  swim- 
ming at  the  University,  but  their  hobby  is  teaching  beginners  how  to  swim 
by  such  a  method  that  they  will  never  understand  how  a  person  can  sink. 

"They  have  written  a  text  book  which  sets  forth  all  land  drills  in 
swimming.  They  hope  to  have  this  adopted  in  the  schools  so  that  children 
will  learn  to  swim  before  they  have  a  chance  to  acquire  a  fear  of  the 
water." — San  Francisco  Examiner. 

The  following  are  a  few  of  the  comments  received  from  five  hun- 
dred students  in  our  summer  session  courses : 

"The  book  entitled  'Swimming  Simplified'  is  as  much  a  key  to  swim- 
ming as  Webster's  Dictionary  is  to  the  English  language.  Perfect  in  every 
detail,  and  if  one  would  learn  swimming,  simply  study  the  rules  therein." 

jMary  Berger,  Intermediate  Swimmer. 

"Anyone  who  has  never  been  near  the  water  could  learn  to  overcome 
the  fear  of  water  and  how  to  swim  by  following  the  instructions  given 
and  studying  the  pictures  illustrating  each  exercise." 

Bertha  Parker,  Beginner. 

"The  book  entitled  'Swimming  Simplified,'  by  Lyba  and  Xita  Sheffield 
is  especially  fine  as  a  text  book  or  complete  guide  for  a  scientific  course 
in  swimming.     It  is  unique  in  its  simplicity  and  force." 

Harriet  Johnson,  Advanced. 

"I  have  tried  to  learn  to  swim  for  the  past  five  years,  and  here  in  five 
weeks  I  have  learned  more  about  it  than  in  all  those  years.  The  book 
with  its  explicit  instructions  analyzing  each  stroke  to  every  detail,  to- 
gether with  the  irresistible  personality  of  the  instructor,  does  the  work. 
I  should  say  this  is  the  last  word  in  scientific  swimming  instruction." 

Else  AI.  Gurber,  Beginner. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  9 

"Originality,  accurate  knowledge  and  keen  comprehension  of  the  exact 
physiological  and  psychological  experiences  of  the  beginner,  is  dominant 
in  the  book,  'Swimming  Simplified.'  It  does  simplify  swimming,  making  it 
so  clear  that  only  intelligence  is  needed  for  comprehension." 

Alexandria  ^nIackie,   Beginner. 

"The  book  has  l)ecn  a  great  aid  in  teaching  me  to  swim.  The  words 
and  language  are  such  that  any  child  could  master  swimming  from  the 
book.  The  book  is  the  most  comprehensive  on  the  subject  of  any  I  have 
ever  read."  Evelyn  Barber,  Beginner. 

'This  book  has  made  it  possible  to  think  through  the  strokes  so  that 
one  may  control  one's  body  when  in  the  water,  which  is  infinitely  better 
than  trying  to  learn  without  knowing  so  definitely  what  one  is  to  do. 
The  explanations  are  wonderfully  clear.  The  book  is  a  most  satisfactory 
treatise  on  swimming  because  the  different  points  to  be  mastered  are  so 
clearly  stated  and  placed  in  such  definite,  easily  comprehensible  form." 

Minerva  Anderson,  Intermediate  Szvinimer. 

"The  book  has  enabled  me  to  do  something  in  four  weeks,  that  I  have 

been  trying  years  to  do.     It  gives  the  science  of  swimming  in  simplified 

progressive  order."  -.,        ^^    ^  .   ^  j-  ,     r     • 

Mrs.  T.  Rooper,  Inter  mediate  Swimmer. 

"  'Swimming  Simplified'  is  the  most  complete,  easily  understood  swim- 
ming manual  ever  published." 

Roberta  Fisher,  Advanced  Student. 

"Anyone  following  the  directions  in  the  book  conscientiously  could 
learn  to  swim  without  any  personal  help." 

Carolyn  Bloser,  Beginner. 

"The  simple  logical  sequence  of  'Swimming  Simplified'  makes  it  invalu- 
able for  individual  instruction  in  swimming.  If  faithfully  followed,  one 
should  learn  to  swim  without  a  teacher." 

Minnie  M.  Hilduch,  Beginner. 


10  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

I.     The  Method  of  Procedure  ix  Learxixg  or  Teaching 

Swimming   13 

The  Alethod  of  Procedure  for  Men  or  Boys  Over  Twelve 

Years    of    Age 13 

The    Method    of    Procedure    for    Women    and    Girls    Over 

Twelve   Years   of    Age 14 

The    Method    of    Procedure    for    Children    from    Six    to 

Twelve   Years    of    Age 14 

II.     The  Beginner's   First  Lessons 19 

First  Steps  in  Overcoming  the  Fear  of  the  Water 19 

Learning  to  Breathe  Correctly 20 

Body    Balance    23 

III.     Analysis  of  the  Various  Swimming  Strokes 43 

The    Elementary    Back    Stroke 43 

The  Shefifield   Sculling   Stroke    51 

The   Under-Arm-Side-Stroke    56 

The    Single-Over-Arm-Side-Stroke    64 

The    Trudgeon    or    Double-Over-Arm-Stroke 69 

The    Trudgeon-Crawl    76 

The    Preliminary-Crawl    80 

The    Crawl    84 

The  Australian-Crawl    93 

The   Racing-Back  or   Alternate   Over-Arm-Back-Strokc.  .  .  93 

^-^        The  Breast  Stroke   98 

(^^IVy  Racing   Turn^Treading  Water — Plunge   for   Distance....  105 

V.     Diving    7^09 

The  Rudiments  of  Diving 109 

Elementary  Divmg   110 

Advanced   Diving    114 

VL     Life   Saving    121 

The  Alethod  of  Procedure  for  an  Actual  Rescue 122 

Preliminary  Live  Saving  Drills 128 

The  Break  and  Carrj^  Methods — Land  Drills 130 

The  Break  and  Carry  Methods— Water  Drills 137 

Schafer  Method  of  Resuscitation 138 

Dr.  Sheffield's  Method  of  Resuscitation 140 

VII.     The  Safety  Valve  and  the  Swimming  and  Life-Saving  Tests  145 

VIII.    Water  Sports 150 

IX.     Suggestions  to  Instructors 157 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  11 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS 

PAGE 

Fig.  3— First  Steps  in  Overcoming  the  Fear  of  the  Water.  Figs.  1 
and  2— Learning  to  Breathe  Correcth^  Figs.  4  and  5 — Body  Bal- 
ance.    Face  submerged-floating,  first  position 21 

Body  Balance.  Figs.  1  and  2 — Warming-up  exercise — the  crawl-kick. 
Figs.  3,  4  and  5 — Land  drill  for  attaining  standing  position  from 
face-submerged-floating 25 

Body  Balance.  Fig.  1 — Face-submerged-floating,  second  position. 
Figs.  2  and  3 — Start  and  glide  of  the  face-submerged-push-off. 
Fig.  4 — True  floating,  first  position   29 

Body  Balance.  Figs.  1,  2  and  3 — -Land  drill  for  attaining  standing  posi- 
tion from  true  floating.  Fig.  A — Application  of  the  land  drill  in 
the  water.  Figs.  5  and  6— Class  drill  for  assuming  and  regaining 
standing    position    from    true    floating ?)^ 

Body  Balance.  Fig.  1 — True  floating,  second  position.  Figs.  2  and 
3 — Start  and  glide  of  the  side-push-off.  Figs.  4  and  5 — Start  and 
glide  of  the  back-push-off.     Fig.  6 — Floating  arms  vertical 37 

The  Elementarv  Back  Stroke.  Figs.  1,  2  and  3  illustrate  counts  One! 
Two!  and 'Three!  of  the  land  drill.  Figs.  4,  5  and  6  illustrate 
counts  One !  Two !  and  Three !  of  the  water  drill 45 

The  Elementary  Back  Stroke.     Figs.  2  and  3 — Class  drills.     Fig.  A — 

Sculling 49 

The  Sheffield  Sculling  Stroke.     Fies.   1   and  2  illustrate  counts  One! 

and  Two!  of  the  land  drill.    Figs.  3  and  4  illustrate  counts  One! 

and  Two !  of  the  water  drill.     Figs.  5  and  6 — Class  drill 53 

The  Under- Arm-Side-Stroke.     Figs.   1.   2,   3   and   4   illustrate   counts 

One!  and  Two  !  of  the  land  drill.    Figs.  5  and  6— Class  drill 57 

The  Under-Arm-Side-Stroke.  Fig.  1 — The  glide.  Fig.  2 — Finish  of 
count  One!  Fig.  3 — Finish  of  count  Two!  Fig.  A — Analysis  of  the 
scissor-kick.  Fig.  5 — Class  in  starting  position.  Fig.  6 — Class 
swimming  under-arm-side-stroke dZ 

The  Single-Over-Arm-Side-Stroke.  Fig.  1  illustrates  the  first  part 
of  count  One!  Fig.  2 — Class  drill  illustrating  first  part  of  count 
One!  Fig.  3 — Finish  of  the  upper  arm  pull.  Fig.  A — Recovery 
of  the  upper  arm.     Fig.  5 — Catch  position  of  the  upper  arm 67 

The  Double-Over-Arm  or  Trudgeon-Stroke.  Figs.  1,  2,  3  and  4  illus- 
trate counts  One!  and  Two!  of  the  land  drill.  Fig.  5 — Class  swim- 
ming  trudgeon-stroke    71 

The  Double-Ovcr-Arm  or  Trudgeon-Stroke.  Fig.  1 — Upper  arm  in 
finish  position.  Fig.  2 — Upper  arm  in  recovery.  Fig.  3 — Upper 
arm  in  catch  position.  Fig.  A — Upper  arm  pulling.  Fig.  5 — Be- 
ginning   of    count    One  ! '^^ 

The  Crawl.    Fig.  1 — Starting  position,  also  showing  upper  arm  in  finish 
position.      Fig.   2 — Upper   arm   in   recovery.      Fig.    3 — Upper   arm 
.    in  catch  position.     Fig.  A — Upper  arm  pulling 85 


12  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

The  Crawl.  Fig.  1 — Upper  or  left  arm  in  catch  position.  Fig.  2 — 
Upper  arm  pulling.  Fig.  3 — Upper  arm  recovering.  Fig.  4 — Front 
view  of  the  upper  arm  recovering.     Fig.  5— Upper  arm  pulling...     87 

The  Racing  Back  or  Alternate  Over-Arm-Back-Stroke.  Figs.  1,  2,  3 
and  4  illustrate  counts  One!  and  Two!  of  the  land  drill.  Fig.  5 — 
Catch  position  of  the  right  arm.    Fig.  6 — Recovery  of  right  arm. .     95 

The  Breast  Stroke.  Fig.  1 — Starting  position.  Figs.  2,  3  and  4  illus- 
trate counts  One !  Two !  and  Three !  of  the  land  drill 99 

The  Breast  Stroke.  Fig.  1 — Starting  position.  Figs.  2,  3  and  4  illus- 
trate counts  One !  Two !  and  Three !  of  the  water  drill 103 

Racing  Turn.  Fig.  1 — The  touch.  Fig.  2 — Body  turn.  Fig.  3 — Push- 
off.    Fig.  4— The  touch.    Fig.  5— The  push-off.    Fig.  6— The  glide  107 

The  Rudiments  of  Diving.  Figs.  1  and  2 — ^Sitting  dive,  starting  posi- 
tion and  dive  in.  Fig.  3 — Kneeling  dive,  starting  position.  Figs. 
4  and  5 — Standing  dive,  starting  position  and  dive  in Ill 

Elementary  Diving.  Figs.  1  and  2 — Standing  dive  with  spring,  start- 
ing position  and  in.  Fig.  3 — Starting  position  for  a  plain  dive. 
Figs.  4  and  5 — Racing  dive — starting  position  and  in 113 

Class  Drill  in  Diving.  Fig.  1 — Land  drill  for  diving.  Figs.  2  and  4 — 
Starting  positions  for  rudimentary  diving.  Fig.  3^Starting  posi- 
tion   for    elementary   diving 115 

Advanced  Diving.     Fig.  1— Working  the  hoard.     Fig.  2 — Swan  dive. 

Fig.  3 — Back  dive.     Fig.  4 — Jack-knife   dive 117 

Live-Saving    Release    Methods — Land    Drills.      Fig.    1 — Wrist    grasp. 

Fig.   2 — Break.     Fig.   3 — The   hody  turn   and   hold   after   release. 

Fig.   4 — Front  neck   grasp.      Fig   5 — Break 123 

Life-Saving    Release    Methods — Land    Drills.      Fig.    1 — Body    grasp. 

Fig.  2 — Break.     Fig.   3 — Land    carry.     Fig.   4 — Rear   neck   grasp. 

Fig.    5— Break 127 

Life-Saving   Release   and   Rescue   Methods — Water   Drills.     Fig.    1 — 

Wrist  break.    Fig.  2— Front  neck  break.    Fig.  3— Rear  neck  break, 
^^^ig.  4 — Cramp  or  fatigued  persons  carry.     Fig.  5 — Head  carry..   129 
Life-Saving  Rescue  and  Resuscitation  Methods.     Fig.  1 — Under  arm 

carry.     Fig.   2— Chest   carry.     Fig.  3— Side  head   carry.     Figs.   4 

and  5 — Schafer  method  resuscitation 133 

Life-Saving  Release  Methods — Land  Drills.  Fig.  1 — Wrist  grasp. 
Fig.  2 — Neck  grasp.  Fig.  3 — Side  carry.  Fig.  4 — Body  turn  and 
hold  after  the  release.  Fig.  5 — Body  break.  Fig.  6 — Rear  neck 
grasp 135 

Life-Saving  Rescue  and  Resuscitation  Drills.  Fig.  1 — Head  carry. 
Fig.  2 — Under  arm  carry.  Fig.  3 — Schafer  method  of  resuscita- 
tion.    Fig.  4 — Under  arm  carry 139 

An  Actual  Rescue.  Fig.  1 — The  alarm.  Fig.  2 — Lowering  the  boat. 
Fig,  3— To  the  rescue.  Figs.  4  and  5— Dr.  Sheffield  illustrating 
his   method   of   resuscitation 141 

Fig.  1— George  Freeth,  world's  champion  surf -board  rider.     Fig.  2 — 

George  Freeth  with  his  mile-a-minute  life-saving  apparatus 143 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  13 


I 


THE  METHOD  OF  PROCEDURE  IN  LEARNING  OR 
TEACHING  SWIMMING 

It  is  impossible  to  advocate  one  method  of  instruction  adaptable  to  all, 
because  of  the  physiological  and  psychological  differences  in  men,  women, 
and  children.  Adapt  the  stroke  to  the  individual  and  not  the  individual 
to  the  stroke. 

]\Iost  instructors  advocate  that  the  beginner's  first  lesson  should  consist 
of  crawl,  breast,  or  side  stroke.  By  such  a  method,  the  beginner,  in  addi- 
tion to  learning  the  already  complicated  stroke,  must  overcome  the  fear  of 
the  water,  learn  to  breathe  and  balance  the  body. 

Our  experience  in  teaching  men,  women,  and  children  has  proven  the 
following  methods  of  procedure  most  satisfactory  for  individual  or  mass 
instruction.  As  a  foundation  for  learning  to  swim  it  is  imperative  that  the 
novice  first  overcome  the  fear  of  the  water;  second,  that  he  learn  to 
breathe  correctly ;  third,  that  he  learn  to  balance  the  body.  Having  learned 
to  balance  the  body  in  the  horizontal  position,  the  natural  and  logical 
progression  for  the  great  majority  is  the  elementary  back  stroke.  Fur- 
thermore, it  serves  as  a  safety-first  measure  when  the  novice  becomes 
frightened  or  fatigued. 

The  Method  of  Procedure  for  Men  or  Boys  Over  Twelve  Years  of  Age 

Group  1.  Group  2. 

For  men  and  boys  who  are  heavily  For  men  and  boys  who  float  easily, 

muscled,  but  who  have  limited  body  are  not  heavily  muscled,  and  whose 

buoyancy,  and  whose  objectives  are  objective    is    acquiring    the    correct 

speed   swimming   and   a  knowledge  form     in     the     various     swimming 

of   the   fundamental   strokes   neces-  strokes    and    a   knowledge   of    life- 

sary  in  life-saving,  this  is  the  best  saving,   this   is   the  best  method   of 

method  of  procedure:  procedure: 

(1)  The   Beginner's   First   Lessons,  (1)   The   Beginner's   First   Lessons, 
Chapter  H.  Chapter  II. 

(2)  The  Preliminary  Crawl.  (2)   The  Elementary  Back  Stroke. 

(3)  The    Elementary    Back    Stroke  (3)   The  Sheffield  Sculling  Stroke, 
is    advisable    as    a    safety-first 

.  measure. 


14 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


(4)  The  Crawl. 

(5)  The  Racing  Back  Stroke. 

(6)  The  Trudgeon-Crawl. 

(7)  The  Trudgeon. 

(8)  The    Single-Over-Arm-Side- 
Stroke. 

(9)  The  Under-Arm-Side-Stroke.  (9)   The    Racing    Back    or    Breast 

Stroke. 


(4)  The  Under-Arm-Side-Stroke. 

(5)  Single-Over-Arm-Side-Stroke. 

(6)  The  Trudgeon. 

(7)  The  Trudgeon-Crawl. 

(8)  The  Crawl. 


The  Method  of  Procedure  for  Women  or  Girls  Over  Twelve  Years  of 

Age 


Group  3. 

For  muscular  athletically  inclined 
women  or  girls  over  twelve  years 
of  age  the  method  of  procedure  is 
the  same  as  that  given  in  Group  1, 


Group  4. 

For  the  great  majority  of  women 
or  girls  over  twelve  years  of  age, 
the  method  of  procedure  is  the 
same  as  that  given  in  Group  2. 


The  Method  of  Procedure  for  Children  From  Six  to  Twelve  Years  of 

Age 

In  teaching  little  folks  to  swim  it  is  first  necessary  to  inspire  them 
with  confidence  by  developing  their  initiative  and  courage  through 
play.  All  children  should  be  taught  the  necessary  preliminary  steps  in 
overcoming  the  fear  of  the  water,  learning  to  breathe  and  balance  the 
body.  However,  the  factors  determining  the  first  stroke  to  be  used  are : 
Age,  weight,  sex,  build,  and  the  child's  natural  inclinations.  Those  who 
are  plump  and  small  boned,  as  is  the  case  with  most  girls  and  some  boys, 
should  be  taught  the  seal  or  elementary  back  stroke.  Most  boys  and  some 
girls  are  muscular  and  heavy  boned,  and  consequently  float  low  in  the 
water,  therefore,  they  should  be  taught  the  dog  paddle  or  preliminary 
crawl. 

After  the  girls  have  learned  the  elementary  back  stroke,  they  should 
proceed  to  the  under-arm-side  stroke  and  then  follow  the  progression  given 
in  Group  2. 

After  the  boys  have  learned  the  dog-paddle  they  should  progress  to  the 
elementary  back  stroke  as  a  safety-first  measure,  then  follow  the  progres- 
sion given  in  Group  1. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  15 

THE  CHILDREN'S  FIRST  LESSON 

1.  The  Bobbing  Seals. 

Exercise  1.  Seals  Bobbing  Their  Heads. 
Duck  the  heads,  then  raise  them. 

Exercise  2.  Seals  Looking  for  Fish. 

Duck  the  heads,  open  the  eyes,  and  look  for  objects. 

For  Particulars  refer  to  Chapter  XL  First  Steps  in  Overcoming  the 
Fear  of  the  Water,  exercises  one,  two,  three,  and  four.  Also  refer  to 
instructors'  note,   page  161. 

2.  The  Seals  Coming  Up  for  Air. 

Exercise  1.  The  Seals  Breathing. 

Breathe  in  through  the  mouth  above  water,  breathe  out  through  the 
nose  under  water.    Refer  to  Chapter  II,  Learning  to  Breathe  Correctly. 

3.  The  Seals  Float,  Glide,  and  Dive. 

Exercise  1.  Seals  Floating  and  Resting. 

Grasp  the  railing,  breathe  in,  duck  the  head,  and  lie  flat  on  the  water 
surface,  body  straight.  Refer  to  Chapter  II.  Body  Balance,  exercise 
one. 

Exercise  2.  Seals  Floating  and  Kicking  Leg  Flappers. 

Grasp  the  railing ;  lie  flat  on  the  water ;  kick  legs  up  and  down,  knee 
straight,  toes  pointed.   Refer  to  Chapter  11.   Body  Balance,  exercise  two. 

Exercise  3.  Seals  Stand  After  Floating. 

The  seal  has  been  floating  and  now  he  wants  to  stand. 

He  straightens  his  body  and  walks  out  on  the  land. 

Grasp  the  railing ;  duck  the  head ;  quickly  bring  the  arms  down  to 
the  bent  knees;  place  the  feet  on  the  bottom;  stand.  Refer  to  Chap- 
ter II.     Body  Balance,  exercise  three. 

Exercise  4.  Seals  Floating  and  Resting. 

Take  the  same  position  as  in  exercise  1  ;  then  let  go  of  the  railing; 
float;  stand.    Refer  to  Chapter  II.    Body  Balance,  exercise  four. 


16  SJVIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

Exercise  5.  Seals  Gliding  Away  From  Rocks. 

Place  foot  against  side  of  tank,  arms  forward;  inhale;  duck  the 
head ;  push  off ;  glide ;  then  stand.  Refer  to  Chapter  II,  Body  Balance, 
exercise  five. 

Exercise  6.  Seals  Glide  and  Kick  Leg  Flappers. 

This  position  is  the  same  as  described  in  exercise  five,  but  during 
the  glide,  kick  the  legs  up  and  down,  knees  straight,  toes  pointed  ;  then 
stand.    Refer  to  Chapter  II.    Body  Balance,  exercise  six. 

Exercise  7.  Seals  Floating  ox  Back. 

Stand,  back  to  side  of  tank;  grasp  railing;  place  head  back; 
straighten  body,  and  bring  feet  to  surface;  then. stand.  Refer  to  Chap- 
ter II.     Body  Balance,  exercise  seven. 

Exercise  8.  Seals  Stand  After  Floating. 

This  starting  position  is  the  same  as  described  in  exercise  seven. 
Then  bend  the  knees  upward ;  inhale ;  bend  the  body  forward  and  duck 
the  head ;  scoop  the  arms  forward ;  place  the  feet  on  bottom  of  pool ; 
stand.    Refer  to  Chapter  II.     Body  Balance,  exercise  eight. 

Exercise  9.  Seals  Floating  on  Back,  Arm  Flappers  to  Side. 

Lie  flat  in  the  water;  float  with  arms  extended  sideways;  stand. 
Refer  to  Chapter  II.     Body  Balance,  exercise  nine. 

Exercise  10.  Seals  Glide  on  Side. 

Grasp  railing;  push  oft';  glide,  and  stand.  Refer  to  Chapter  II.  Body 
Balance,  exercise  ten. 

Exercise  11.  Seals  Turning  in  the  Water. 

Float  on  back;  turn  over  and  float  on  the  face  and  vice  versa. 
Refer  to  Chapter  11.     Body  Balance,  exercise  eleven. 

Exercise  12.  Seals  Gliding  Away  From  Rocks  on  Back. 

Grasp  railing;  place  feet  against  pool;  inhale;  slowly  and  easily 
push  away;  glide;  stand.  Refer  to  Chapter  II.  Body  Balance,  exercise 
twelve. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  17 

THE  PRELIMINARY  STROKE  FOR  GIRLS 
The  Seal  Stroke  or  Elementary  Back  Stroke 

1.  Seals  Swimming  on  Their  Backs,  Using  Their  Arm  Flappers. 

LAND  AND   WATER   DRILI.S 

Up  easy,  out,  and  full. 
You  swim  when  you  pull. 

Like  the  seals  using  their  arm  flappers,  we  slowly  bring  the  hands  up  to 
the  shoulders,  out  to  the  side,  and  then  forcibly  pull  down  to  the  body. 

2.  Seals  Swimming  on  Their  Backs,  Using  Their  Leg  Flappers. 

Up  easy,  out,  and  kick. 
You  swim  when  your  flappers  click. 

Like  little  seals  using  their  leg  flappers,  we  sliDwly  bend  our  knees,  ex- 
tend the  legs  to  the  side,  and  then  forcibly  bring  them  together. 

3.  Seals  Swimming  on  Their  Backs,  Using  Their  Arm  and  Leg   Flappers. 

Arms  and  legs  up  easy  and  full, 
You  swim  when  you  pull. 
Like  a  little  seal  on  his  back, 
You  swim  when  your  flappers  crack. 

For  a  detailed  description  refer  to   Chapter  II,  the   Elementary  Back 
Stroke.     Page  43. 


THE  PRELIMINARY  STROKE  FOR  BOYS 
The  Dog-Paddle  or  Preliminary  Crawl 

1.  Little  Dogs  Swimming,  Using  Their  Front  Paws. 

LAND  AND  WATER  DRILLS 

Circle  over  and  pull  under. 

Try  it,  you'll  be  a  little  wonder. 

Start  an   alternating  arm   paddle   by   forcil)ly   pulling  deep   down   and 

under  with  the  right  arm,  at  the  same  time  circling  over  and  forward 

with  the  left.     Don't  forget  to  bend  the  elbows  and  keep  the  hands  low. 


18  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

2.  Little  Dogs  Swimming,  Using  Their  Back  Legs. 

Knees  straight,  toes  pointed,  now  kick. 
The  thrash  must  be  short  and  quick. 

Start  with  the  arms  in   front  of  the  head,  body  straight,  inhale,   duck 
the  head,  kick  the  legs,  then  stand. 

3,  Little  Dogs  Swimming  Using  Their  Front  and  Back  Legs. 

Circle  over  and  pull  under. 
At  the  same  time  kick  like  a  little  wonder. 

For  a  detailed  analysis  refer  to  Chapter  III,  The  Preliminary  Crawl, 
Page   80. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  19 

II 
THE  BEGINNER'S  FIRST  LESSONS 

1.  First  Steps  in  Overcoming  the  Fear  of  the  Water. 

In  learning  to  swim,  the  beginner  must  first  overcome  the  dread  of 
entering  the  water  and  of  submerging  the  face.  The  tendency  of  the  unin- 
structed  is  to  frantically  inhale  the  water  and  stiffen  the  body.  To  over- 
come this  fear,  practice  the  following  exercises  : 

I.AND  DBILIi 

Exercise  1. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

The  starting  position  for  exercises  one,  two  and  three  is  as  follows : 
Use  a  large  bowl  filled  with  water,  place  the  right  side  of  the  face  in  the 
water,  mouth  raised  sufiicicntly  to  clear  the  surface. 

(1)   Inhale! 

Inhale  through  the  mouth,  then  close  it. 

(3)   Nose— Hold! 

Hold  the  nostrils  firmly  with  the  fingers  and  close  the  eyes. 

(3)  Face — Submerge! 

Hold   nostrils ;    submerge   the    face   and   hold   the   breath   for   five 
counts. 

(4)  Starting  position — Take! 


Exercise  2. 

(1)  Inhale! 

Same  as  (1),  exercise  one. 

(2)  Face — Submerge  ! 

Omit  holding  the  nostrils  then  submerge  the  face. 

(3)  Eyes — Open! 

After  the  face  is  submerged  open  the  eyes  and  hold  the  breath  for 
five  counts.     Fig.  3.   Page  21. 

(4)  Starting  position — Take  ! 


20  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


Exercise  3. 


(1)  Inhale! 

Same  as   (1),  exercise  one. 

(2)  Face — Submerge! 

Submerge  the  face,  open  the  eyes,  and  hold  the  breath  from  ten  to 
frfty  seconds. 

Important  Note. — Gradually  increase  holding  the  breath  up  to  fifty 
seconds.  The  length  of  time  one  is  able  to  hold  the  breath  depends  upon 
the  individual's  breath  control  and  lung  capacity. 


WATER  DRILIi 

Exercise  4. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Enter  the  shallow  end  of  the  pool,  grasp  the  railing  or  side  of  the  tank 
by  means  of  the  over-hand  grasp,  arms  extended.  Submerge  the  shoul- 
ders, and  place  the  right  side  of  the  face  in  the  water,  mouth  raised 
sufficiently  to  clear  the  surface. 

(1)  Practice  exercises  one,  two  and  three  of  the  land  drill,  until  all 
fear  and  discomfort  of  submerging  the  face  is  overcome. 


DON'T 

Don't  submerge  the  face  with  mouth  open,  because  the  beginner  is 
apt  to  swallow  water. 

Don't  inhale  while  face  is  submerged,  because  this  causes  choking. 

Don't  forget  to  open  the  eyes  when  the  face  is  submerged,  as  this 
gives  confidence. 


II.  Learning  to  Breathe  Correctly. 

It  is  impossible  to  swim  any  stroke  successfully  and  scientifically  with- 
out knowing  how  to  breathe  correctly.  This  consists  of  repeated  deep 
inhalations  through  the  mouth  and  forcible  exhalations  through  the 
nose.  Practice  this  drill  until  breathing  in  this  new  manner  becomes  natural 
and  rhythmical. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


21 


Fig.  3.  First  Steps  in  Overcoming  the  Fear  of  the  Water.  Figs.  1  and 
2.  Learning  to  Breathe  Correctly.  Figs.  4  and  5.  Body  Balance.  Face- 
submerged-floating— first  position. 


22  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

Inhaling  and  exhaling  through  the  mouth  has  proven  unsatisfactory, 
because  the  novice  is  apt  to  inliale  water  when  the  face  is  submerged, 
thus  causing  choking.  While  inhaling  through  the  mouth  and  exhaling 
through  the  nose  prevents  choking  and  gives  one  absolute  control  of 
breathing. 

i.and  drili. 

Exercise  1. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Use  a  large  bowl  filled  with  water.  Place  the  right  side  of  the  face  in 
the  water,  mouth  raised  sufficiently  to  clear  surface. 

(1)  Inhale! 

Inhale  through  the  mouth  then  close  it. 

(2)  Face   submerge — Exhale  ! 

Submerge  the  face,  then  forcibly  exhale  most  of  the  air  through 
the  nose,  thereby  blowing  bubbles.     Fig.  3.  Page  21. 

(3)  Turn  head — Exhale! 

Turn  the  head  as  in  starting  position,  exhale  the  remaining  air 
forcibly  through  the  nose,  thus  avoiding  the  unpleasant  sensation  of  in- 
haling water. 

Repeat  the  exercise.  Then,  without  stopping  or  touching  the  face, 
continue  rhythmically  from  five  to  fifty  times. 


water  drill, 

Exercise  2. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

This  starting  position  is  the  same  as  described  in  water  drill,  exercise 
four. 

(1)  Practice  exercise  one,  of  the  above  land  drill  for  correct  breathing 
until  perfected.     Figs.   1   and  2.  Pa^e  21. 

Refer  to  instructors'  note  for  exercises  one,  two,  three  and  four,  page 
161. 


DON'T 

Don't  raise  the  top  of  the  head  high  out  of  the  water  \vhen  breath- 
ing, because  this  partially  submerges  the  mouth  and  causes  choking. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  23 

Don't  forget  to  forcibly  exhale  the  remaining  air  above  water  sur- 
face before  the  next  inhalation,  because  it  will  prevent  choking. 

Don't  attempt  to  breathe  by  lifting  the  head  high  out  of  the  water 
and  then  submerging  it,  because  it  disturbs  body  balance.  This  fault 
must  be  avoided  in  all  swimming  strokes. 


III.  Body  Balance. 

After  the  novice  has  overcome  the  fear  of  entering  the  water  and 
is  able  to  breathe  correctly,  the  next  step  is  learning  to  balance  the 
body  in  various  positions.  Floating  is  body  bouyancy  and  correct  bal- 
ance in  the  water.  It  is  of  value  as  a  means  of  resting  the  body,  is  use- 
ful in  case  of  cramp  or  fatigue  and  in  life  saving.  Floating  is  the  be- 
ginner's safety  valve.  When  frightened  or  fatigued  float  or  scull.  When 
the  following  thirteeen  exercises  for  body  balance  have  been  learned 
the  beginner  is  ready  for  the  first  stroke. 

Exercise  1.     Face-Submerged-Floating.     First  Position. 

This  demonstrates  body  bouyancy.  If  one  takes  a  deep  inhalation, 
then  submerges  the  head,  the  feet  will  rise  near  the  water  surface. 
This  is  one  of  the  easiest  possible  floating  positions. 

WATER  DRILL, 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Grasp  the  railing  or  side  of  the  tank,  arms  extended;  submerge  the 
shoulders.  Extend  the  legs,  feet  placed  on  the  bottom  of  the  pool,  then 
raise  the  left  leg  to  water  surface. 

(1)  Inhale,  head — -Submerge! 

Take  a  deep  inhalation  through  the  mouth,  and  submerge  the 
head  between  the  extended  arms. 

(2)  Face-submerged-floating  position — Take  ! 

Raise  the  right  foot,  finishing  with  the  feet  together  near  water 
surface.  Assume  horizontal  position,  arms  and  legs  extended,  body  re- 
laxed.   Hold  this  position  for  five  counts.     Figs.  4  and  5.  Page  21. 

(3)  Standing  position — Take! 

Regain  standing  position  by  raising  the  head  and  i)Iacing  the  feet 
on  the  bottom  of  the  tank. 


24  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

Important  Note.— If  the  railing  or  side  of  the  tank  is  high  above  the 
water,  a  correct  face-^ubmerged-floating  position  is  ^difficult  to  assume, 
because  of  the  raised  arms  and  shoulders.  In  this  case  one  would  only 
be  able  to  approximate  this   exercise. 

Refer  to  instructors'  note   for   Body  Balance,  exercise  one,  page   161. 


DON'T 

Don't  forget  that  a  deep  inhalation  is  necessary,  as  it  increases  body 
bouyancy. 

Don't  forget  to  take  a  deep  inhalation  before  submerging  the  face, 
because  the  breath  must  be  held  for  five  counts,  thus  permitting  the 
feet  to  rise  near  the  surface. 

Don't  attempt  the  face-submerged-  floating  position  without  first 
extending  the  legs,  otherwise  it  will  be  difficult  for  the  feet  to  rise  to 
the  surface. 


Exercise  2.  Warming-up  Exercise— The-Crawl-Kick. 

If  the  water  is  too  cold,  this  exercise  promotes  circulation,  also 
serves  as  a  means  of  propelling  the  body  through  the  water,  and  gives 
confidence  to  the  novice. 


WATER   DRILI. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Assume  a  correct  face-submerged-floating  position  as  described  in 
the  preceding  exercise.  Be  careful  to  have  the  legs  extended,  knees  al- 
most touching,  toes  pointed,  and  ankles  relaxed.     Fig.  4.  Page  21. 

(1)  Left  leg— Kick! 

(2)  Right  leg— Kick! 

Practice  the  crawl  kick,  which  consists  of  a  series  of  quick  al- 
ternate up  and  down  leg  thrashes  of  even  length.  The  leg  drive  extends 
from  the  hips  to  the  pointed  toes,  the  thrash  being  about  eight  inches 
and  not  more  than  fourteen.  At  first  work  the  legs  slowly,  and  gradually 
increase  the  speed  until  a  correct  and  easy  rhythm  is  established.  Be 
careful  not  to  raise  the  feet  above  the  water  surface  or  noticeably  bend 
the  knees  and  ankles,  as  it  impedes  progress.     Figs.  1  and  2.  Page  25. 


SIVIMMING  SlMPLll^lBD 


25 


Body  Balance.  Figs.  1  and  2.  Warming-up  exercise — the  crawl- 
kick.  Figs.  3,  4  and  5.  Land  drill  for  attaining  standing  position 
from  face-submergcd-floating. 


26  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


DON'T 


Don't  noticeably  bend  the  knees  and  ankles,  or  raise  the  feet  out  of 
the  water,  because  energy  is  lost. 

Don't  forget  to  point  the  toes  and  keep  the  knees  close  together, 
otherwise  one  would  retard  progress. 


Exercise  3.  Attaining  Standing  Position  from  Face-Submerged-Float- 
ing. 

The  beginner  usually  finds  it  difficult  to  regain  standing  position  once 
the  feet  are  off  the  bottom  of  the  pool.  However,  if  this  exercise  is  prac- 
ticed carefully,  it  is  a  simple  matter. 

LAND   DRILL, 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand,  body  erect,  arms  to  vertical,  thumbs  locked.  Bend  the  body 
forward  to  the  imaginary  water  line  and  raise  the  extended  left  leg  to 
the  rear.     Fig.  3.   Page  25. 

(1)  Left  knee  upward — Bend! 

Bend  the  left  knee,  finishing  with  it  close  to  the  chest.  Fig.  4. 
Page  25. 

(2)  Arms  to  side  of  body — Place! 

Forcibly  bring  the  extended  arms  down  to  the  side  of  the  body. 
Fig.   4.    Page   25. 

(3)  Foot— Replace ! 

(4)  Correct  standing  position — Take! 

Practice  this  drill,  first  using  left  leg  then  the  right  until  it  is 
learned.  Remember  to  keep  the  head  down  until  the  foot  is  placed  on 
the  floor.    Fig.  5.  Page  25. 

WATER   DRILL 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Assume  a  correct  face-submerged-floating  position,  holding  on  to  the 
railing. 

(1)  Knees  upward — Bend! 

Draw  the  knees  well  under  the  body. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  27 

(2)  Arms  to  the  side  of  body — Place ! 

Let  go  of  the  raihng  and  forcibly  and  quickly  bring  the  extended 
arms  down  through  the  water,  to  the  side  of  the   body. 

(3)  Feet— Replace ! 

Quickly  straighten  the  legs,  and  place  the   feet  on  the  bottom  of 
the  pool. 

(4)  Correct  standing  position — Take  ! 

Raise  the  head,  and  assume  correct  standing  position. 

DON'T 

Don't  raise  the  head  from  the  water  until  the  arms  are  brought 
down  to  the  side  of  the  body  and  the  feet  placed  on  the  bottom  of  the 
tank,  because  this  is  necessary  in  obtaining  the  correct  standing  po- 
sition. 


Exercise  4.  Face-Submerged-Floatixg — Second  Position. 

Having  learned  face-submerged-  floating,  while  holding  on  to  the  raib 
ing,  the  beginner  is  ready  for  the  second  position,  which  demonstrates 
body  bouyancy. 

WATER   DRILI. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Assume  face-submerged-floating  position,  holding  on  to  the  railing. 
Fig.  4.  Page  21. 

(1)  Let— Go! 

Let  go  of  the  railing,  and  float  face-submerged  holding  the  breath 
for  five  counts.  Assume  a  horizontal  position,  arms  and  legs  extended, 
body  relaxed.     Fig.  L  Page  29. 

(2)  Up ! 

Then   regain   standing  position  as   described   in   exercise  three. 
Refer  to  instructors'  note  for  Body  Balance,  exercise  four,  page  161. 

DON'T 

Don't  attempt  face-submerged-floating  without  first  taking  a  deep 
inhalation,  because  this  increases  body  bouyancy. 


28,  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

Don't  attempt  to  push  bod}'  away  from  the  side  of  the  tank,  as  it 
tends  to  sink  the  feet. 

Don't  attempt  horizontal  face-submerged-floating  with  the  head 
raised  high,  because  it  sinks  the  feet. 

Don't  attempt  to  regain  standing  position  immediately  after  letting 
go  of  the  railing,  because  this  is  not  a  test  of  body  bouyancy. 


Exercise  5.  FACE-SuBMERGEn-PusH-OpF. 

After  learning  the  above  exercises  the  novice  is  ready  for  the  first 
step  in  learning  to  swim,  that  is,  the  body  in  motion. 

WATER  DRILL 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand  v^•ith  the  back  to  the  side  of  the  tank,  shoulders  submerged. 

Extend  the  arms  in  front  of  the  body,  thumbs  locked,  resting  on  water 
surface.  Then  incline  the  body  forward,  at  the  same  time  keeping  the  hips 
well  back  against  the  side  of  the  tank;  place  the  sole  of  one  foot  against 
the  side  of  the  pool.     Fig.  2.  Page  29. 

(1)  Inhale,  head — Submerge! 

Take  a  deep  inhalation  through  the  mouth ;  submerge  the  face  be- 
tween the  extended  arms  until  the  ears  are  covered.     Fig.  2.  Page  29. 

(2)  Push— Off! 

Then  quickly  and  forcibly  push  the  body  away  from  the  side  of 
the  tank,  by  straightening  the  flexed  leg,  bringing  the  supporting  leg 
into  the  extended  position,  heels  and  knees  touching. 

(3)  Glide! 

If  executed  correctly,  the  body  will  glide  forward  in  the  face-sub- 
merged-fioating  position,  as  far  as  the  momentum  of  the  push-ofT  will 
permit,  and  as  long  as  one  is  able  to  hold  the  breath.     Fig.  3.  Page  29. 

(4)  Correct  standing  position — Take  ! 

Regain  standing  position  as  described  in  exercise  three. 

Refer  to  instructors'  note  for  Body  Balance,  exercise  five,  page  161. 

DON'T 

Don't  attempt  to  push  off  without  first  taking  a  deep  breath,  be- 
cause it  decreases  the  glide. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


29 


bud}'  Balance.  Fig.  1.  Face-submerged-floating — second  position. 
Figs.  2  and  3.  Start  and  glide  of  the  face-submerged-push-ofif.  Fig  4. 
True  floating — first  position. 


30  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

Don't  attempt  to  push  off  with  the  head  held  high  out  of  the  water, 
because  it  sinks  the  feet. 

Don't  start  with  the  body  away  from  the  side  of  the  pool,  because 
in  this  way  momentum  is  lost  in  the  push-off. 

Don't  attempt  to  push  away  slowly,  because  it  limits  the  glide. 


Exercise  6.  Face-Suemerged-Push-Off  with  Crawl-Kick. 

This  drill  is  valuable  as  a  warming-up  exercise  and  is  the  first  step 
in  propelling  the  body  forward. 

WATER  DRILI. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

The  starting  position  for  the  push-off  is  the  same  as  described  in  ex- 
ercise five. 

(1)  Push-Off-Crawl-Kick. 

After  the  push-off  and  during  the  glide,  use  a  fast  crawl-kick,  as 
long  as  you  are  able  to  hold  the  breath.  Regain  standing  position. 

DON'T 

Don't  glide  too  far  before  beginning  the  crawl-kick,  as   one  would 
not  be  able  to  hold  the  breath  long  enough  during  the  glide  and  kick. 

Refer  to  the  "Don't"  section  of  exercises  three  and  five,  under  Body 
Balance. 


Exercise  7.  True  Floating — First  Position. 

This  is  the  beginners  first  lesson  in  acquiring  Body  Balance  while  on 
the  back. 

WATER   DRIEE 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand  wnth  back  to  the  side  of  the  tank,  shoulders  submerged.  Grasp 
the  railing  by  means  of  the  overhand  grasp,  arms  apart.  Then  raise  the 
extended  left  leg  to  water  surface. 

(1)  Inhale,  head— Back! 

Take  a  deep  inhalation  through  the  mouth,  lower  the  head  back- 
wards until  the  ears  are  submerged. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  31 

(2)  True  floating  position — Take  ! 

Raise  the  right  foot,  thereby  finishing  with  the  legs  extended  and 
apart,  near  water  surface.  At  the  same  time  assume  a  horizontal  posi- 
tion by  raising  the  chest  and  hips,  body  relaxed.  Float  in  this  position 
for  a  little  while.     Fig.  4.   Page  29. 

(3)  Standing  position — Take! 

Regain  standing  position  by  holding  on  the  railing  with  one  hand, 
submerging  the  head,  IxMicling  the  knees,  then  placing  the  feet  on  the 
bottom  of  the  pool. 

Important  Note. — If  the  railing  or  the  side  of  the  tank  is  high  above 
the  water,  a  correct  true  floating  position  is  difficult  to  assume  because  of 
the  raised  arms  and  shoulders.  In  this  case  one  would  only  be  able  to  ap- 
proximate the  exercise. 

DON'T 

Don't  attempt  true  floating  position  with  the  head  held  high,  be- 
cause this  tends  to  sink  the  feet. 

Don't  stiffen  the  body  when  assuming  correct  floating  position,  be- 
cause this  is  fatiguing  and  difficult. 

Don't  hold  the  breath  or  take  short  gasps,  because  greater  buoyancy 
is  attained  through  deep  inhalations. 

Don't  assume  the  true  floating  position  with  body  in  a  half  sitting 
position,  as  the  body  will  sink. 


Exercise  8.  Attaining  Standing  Position  from  True  Floating. 

Before  learning  true  floating  the  beginner  should  know  how  to  attain 
standing  position. 

I>AND  DRILL. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand,  body  erect,  arms  side  horizontal,  palms  down.     Fig.  1.  Page  33. 

(1)  Left  knee  upward — Bend! 

(2)  Body  forward — Bend  ! 

(3)  Head— Down! 

(4)  Arms  forward — Scoop  ! 

Quickly  and  forcibly  bring  the  extended  arms  from  the  side  hori- 
zontal position,  back,  down,  finishing  with  the  extended  arms  in  front 
of  the  body,  palms  up.     Figs.  2  and  3.  Page  33. 


32  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

(5)  Foot — Replace! 

(6)  Correct  standing  position — Take! 

WATER   DRILL, 
FIRST  WATER  DRILL. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand  in  the  shallow  end  of  the  pool, shoulders  suhmerged.  Arms  ex- 
tended side  horizontal  palms  down  and  resting  on  the  water  surface. 

(1)  Left  knee  upward — Bend! 

(2)  Inhale! 

(3)  Body  forward — Bend! 

(4)  Head — Submerge! 

(5)  Arm.s  forward — Scoop! 

Quickly  and  forcibly  bring  the  extended  arms  from  the  side  horizontal 
position,  back  and  deep  down  through  the  water,  finishing  in  front  of  the 
body,  palms  up. 

(6)  Foot  on  bottom  of  pool — Place! 

(7)  Correct  standing  position — Take  ! 

SECOND  WATER   DRILL. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Assume  the  true  floating  position  holding  on  to  the  railing  or  the  side 
of  the  tank  as  described  in  exercise  seven.  Then  let  go  of  the  railing,  fin- 
ishing with  the  arms  in  the  side  horizontal  position,  palms  down, extended 
legs  slightly  apart  and  relaxed.  Hold  this  position  for  at  least  five  counts. 
Fig.   1.  Page  37. 

(1)  Knees  upward — Bend! 

Bring  the  knees  up  close  to  the  body.     Fig.  4,  Page  33. 

(2)  Inhale! 

(3)  Body  forward — Bend! 

Bend  the  body  forward  by  relaxing  the  back,  thereby  causing  the 
hips  to  sink  and  the  body  to  assume  a  sitting  position.     Fig.  4,  Page  33. 

(4)  Head — Submerge! 

(5)  Arms  forward — Scoop! 

Forcibly  bring  the  arms   down   through  the  water,   finisliing  with 
the  extended  arms  in  front  of  the  body,  palms  up. 

(6)  Feet  on  bottom  of  pool — Place ! 

(7)  Correct  standing  position — Take! 

Practice  this  drill  until  it  is  executed  correctlv  and  with  ease. 


SJyiMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


33 


Body  Pjalance.  Figs.  1,  2  and  3.  Land  drill  for  attaining  standing 
position  from  true  floating.  Fig.  4.  Application  of  the  land  drill  in 
the  water.  Figs.  5  and  6.  Class  drill  for  assuming  and  regaining 
standing  position  from  true  floating. 


34  SU'JMMlXi^  SlMr/JI-II-D 

Lmpcrtant  Ncte.— After  one  has  learned  to  swim  and  desires  to  attain 
the  npright  position  while  in  deep  water,  he  should  practice  the  above  ex- 
ercise as  given,  but  omit  submergmg  the  head  and  placing  the  feet  on  the 
bottom. 

Refer  to  instructors"  note,  for  Body  Balance,  exercise  eight,  page  162. 

DON'T 

Don't  attempt  to  stand  with  the  knees  and  back  held  rigid,  l)ccause 
it  makes  regaining  standing  position  impossible. 

Don't  attempt  to  bring  the  arms  forward  without  first  submerging 
the  head,  because  one  is  apt  to  stiffen  the  body  and  lose  balance. 

Don't  forget  to  relax  the  body  and  keep  the  head  forward  and  under 
water  during  this  exercise,  because  it  is  necessary  in  regaining  stand- 
ing position. 


Exp:rcise  9.  True  Floating — Second  Position. 

True  floating  is  of  value  as  a  means  of  resting  the  body  and  is  useful 
in  case  of  cramp  and  life-saving.  In  correct  horizontal  floating  the  head 
should  be  held  well  back,  ears  under  the  water,  chin  in,  and  the  chest  high, 
the  arms  and  legs  submerged  and  the  body  relaxed.  The  breathing  should 
be  natural  and  regular.  Floating  is  the  beginners  safety  valve.  When 
frightened  or  fatigued,  float  or  scull. 


WATKR    DRlT.Tv 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand,  facing  the  side  of  the  tank,  shoulders  submerged,  arms  in  side 
horizontal  position,  palms  down.  Raise  the  extended  left  leg  to  water  sur- 
face. 

(1)  Inhale,  head— Back  ! 

Inhale  and  slowly  incline  the  l)ody  backward,  placing  the  head  in 
the  water  until  the  ears  are  submerged. 

(2)  True  floating  position — Take! 

Raise  the  right  foot,  thereby  finishing  with  the  legs  extended  and 
together.  At  the  same  time  assume  horizontal  position  by  raising  the  chest 
and  hips,  body  relaxed.  Float  in  this  position  for  a  little  while.  Fig.  1. 
Page  37. 


SH/MM/XC  SI  M  I' 1. 1  !■  I  IIP  35 

(3)  Standing  position — Take! 

Regain    standing   position   as   described    in    exercise   eight.    Practice 
this  (h-ill  nntil  it  is  execnted  correctly  and  with  ease. 

Refer   to   instructors"   note    for   Body    Balance,   exercise  nine,   page   162. 

DON'T 

Don't  forget  to  breathe  naturally,  because  deep  inhalations  give 
added  bouyancy  to  the  bod}-  and  insure  confidence. 

Don't  raise  the  arms  high  out  of  the  water,  because  this  sinks  the 
body. 

Don't  relax  the  back,  assuming  a  sitting  position,  because  true  float- 
ing is  impossible. 

Don't  hold  the  body  rigid  while  floating,  because  such  a  position  is 
difficult  anrl  fatiguing. 


KxiiRciSE  10.  Analysis  of  tiik  Side-Push-Off. 

It  is  essential  to  learn  the  side-push-off  in  order  that  the  novice  may 
control  and  balance  the  body  while  swimming  on  the  side.  This  position  is 
largely  determined  by  the  head. 

W ATJJK   DRILL 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand  with  the  left  side  of  the  body  towards  the  railing,  shoulders  sul)- 
merged ;  grasp  the  railing  with  the  left  hand ;  extend  the  right  arm  in 
front  of  the  body  resting  on  the  water  surface,  palm  down.  Place  the 
right  side  of  the  head  in  the  water;  look  back  slightly  over  the  left  shoul- 
der, mouth  raised  sufficiently  to  clear  water  surface,  that  is,  chin  up,  top 
of  head  low.  Assume  the  horizontal  position  of  the  body  by  placing  the 
soles  of  the  feet  against  the  side  of  the  tank  as  near  water  surface  as  pos- 
sible, knees  well   flexed.     Fig.  2,   Page  Z7. 

(1)  Inhale! 

(2)  Push— off! 

Quickly  and  forc'bly  push  tin  body  away  from  the  side  of  the  tank 
i)y  extending  the  flexed  knees;  at  the  same  time  bring  the  extended  left 
arm  to  the  side  of  the  body. 

(3)  Glide! 

If  the  push-off  is  executed  correctly,  the  body  glides  forward  in 
the  side-push-off  position,  exhale  during  the  glide.     Fig.  3.   Page  2)7. 


36  SJVIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

Important  Note. — Regain  standing  position  as  sopn  as  momentum  of 
the  glide  has  ceased.  If  the  body  turns  over  on  the  face  during  the  glide, 
it  is  because  the  head  is  held  too  far  forward.  If  one  turns  on  the  back,  it 
is  because  one  is  looking  too  far  back  over  the  left  shoulder. 

(4)  Correct  standing  position — Take  ! 

Regain  standing  position  by  quickly  bending  the  head  and  body  to 
the  left,  at-  the  same  time  bringing  both  hands  together  in  front  of  the 
body,  then  placing  the  feet  on  the  bottom. 

DON'T 

Don't  attempt  to  push-off  without  first  taking  a  deep  breath,  be- 
cause it  limits  the  glide. 

Don't  attempt  to  push-off  with  the  head  forward,  as  it  will  turn  the 
body  on  the  chest. 

Don't  attempt  to  push  off  with  the  head  held  too  far  back,  as  it 
will  turn  the  body  on  the  back. 

Don't  attempt  to  push  away  slowly,  because  it  decreases  momentum 
of  the  glide. 


Exercise  11.  Changing  Body  Positions. 

After  the  novice  has  learned  to  float  with  the  face  submerged  and  on 
the  back,  occasion  may  demand  a  change  from  one  of  these  positions  to 
the  other,  especially  in  deep  water.  It  is  equally  important  to  change  from 
either  of  these  positions  to  the  side.  In  order  to  have  confidence  and  ab- 
solute control  of  the  body  these  exercises  must  be  learned. 

LAND   DRILL, 
FIRST   LAND   DRILL. 

Changing     Body    Position    from    Face-Submerged-Floating     to     True 

Floating. 

(1)  Left  arm  pull  and  body— Turn  ! 

Forcibly  and  quickly  pull  the  extended  left  arm  down  (through  the  wa- 
ter) to  the  side  of  the  body,  at  the  same  time  quickly  turn  the  head  and 
body  to  the  left. 

(2)  True  floating  position — Take! 

Finish  with  the  arms  in  the  side  horizontal  position,  palms  down.  As- 
sume the  true  floating  position  for  a  short  time. 

Important  Note. — Execute  counts  One!  and  Two!  quickly  and  as  one 
continuous  motion. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


37 


Body  Balance.  Fig.  1.  True  floating-second  position.  Figs.  2 
and  3.  Start  and  glide  of  the  side-push-off.  Figs.  4  and  5.  Start  and 
glide  of  the  back-push-off.     Fig.  6.  Floating  arms  vertical. 


38  SJVIMMIXG  SIMPLIFIED 


SECOND   I.AM)    DKII.L. 


Changing  Body  Position  from  True  Floating  to  Face-Submerged- 
Floating 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Assume  correct  true  floating  position. 

(1)  Left  arm  pull  and  body — Turn! 

Forcibly  and  (|uickly  pull  tbe  extended  left  arm  down  (through  the 
water)  to  the  side  of  the  body,  at  the  same  time  turn  the  head  and  body  to 
the  left. 

(2)  Face-submerging-floating  position — Take! 

Finish  with  the  extended  arms  forward,  thumbs  locked.  Assume  the 
face-submerged-floating  position  for  a  short  time. 

Importaxt  Note. — Execute  counts  One!  and  Two!  quickly  and  as  one 
continuous  motion. 


THIKI)   I.AM)   DKIT.I.. 

Changing  Body  Posit'on  from  Face-Submerged-Floating  to  the  Right 

Side 
Starting  position — Take  ! 
Assume  correct  face-submerged-tloating  position. 

(1)  Left  arm  pull  and  body — Turn! 

Forcibly  and  (juickly  bring  the  extended  left  arm  down  (through  the 
water)  to  the  left  side  of  the  body.  At  the  same  time  quickly  turn  the  head 
and  body  to  the  left.  The  extended  right  arm  remains  in  starting  position, 
palm  liown   (resting  on  tlie  water  surface.) 

(2)  Side  floating  position — Take! 
Finish  with  the  body  on  the  right  side. 

(3)  Standing  position — Take! 

Lnmediately  regain  standing  position  by  qu.ickly  bending  head  and  body 
to  the  left.  Forcibly  bring  the  right  arm  (deep  down  through  the  water) 
in  front  of  the  body  until  it  meets  the  left,  at  the  same  time  placing 
the  feet  on  the  bottom  of  the  pool. 

Lmportaxt  Xote. — Counts  One!  Two!  and  Three!  should  be  executed 
quickly  and  as   one  continuous  motion. 


.vnv.i/.u/.vc;  simi'LIFIhl)  39 

101  KTIi    1,\M>    DKILI.. 

Changing  Body  Position  from  True  Floating  to  the  Right  Side 

Starting  positiDii — Take  ! 

Assume  a  o^rrcct  true  floating  ])()siti"n. 

{ 1  )  Left  arm  i)ull  and  body — Turn  ! 

F()rcil)ly  l)ring  the  extended  left  arm  down  (through  the  water)  to  the 
side  of  the  body,  ar.d  at  the  same  time  turn  the  head  and  body  to  the  right. 
Tbe  extended  right  arm  should  assume  a  vertical  i)osition  (resting  on  the 
water  surface)  palm  down. 

(2)  Side  push-off  ])osition — Take! 

Finish  with  the  body  extended  in  the  s'de  i)osition. 

(3)  Standing  position — Take! 

Immediately   regain    standing   positicni    as    described    in   preceding   drill. 

lMP(;kTAXT  XoTK. — Couuts  One!  Two!  and  Three!  should  be  executed 
as  one  continuous   motion. 

W.XTEIl    1)KII.I. 
I  IKST  WATKR   I>KII.I.. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Assume  correct  starting  position  necessary  for  each  drill. 

(1)  Then  practice  the  arm  motions  for  the  above  land  drills  one.  two 
three  and  four. 

SECOND    WATER   DKIET.. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Assume  the  correct  floating  jjositions  necessary  for  each  drill. 

(\)  Then,  practice  the  arm  motions  and  body  turns  as  descril)ed  in  the 
preceding  land  drills  one.  two.  three  and  four. 

Refer  to  tlie  instructors'  note.  Bodv  Balance,  exercise  nine,  i^age  162. 


DON'T 

Don't  attem])t  to  change  the  body  position  without  first  taking  a 
•  hep  breath,  as  it  re(|uires  time  to  make  the  body  change. 

Don't  raise  the  arms  high  out  of  the  water  in  changing  the  body 
position,  as  this  tends  to  sink  the  body  and  make  the  turn  .more  difficult. 


40  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

Don't  forget  to  turn  with  a  quick  and  forcible  head,  arm,  and  body 
motion,  because  it  is  necessary  for  the  novice  to  gain  sufficient  momen- 
tum in  making  a  turn. 

Don't  attempt  to  turn  with  the  body  in  a  sitting  position  or  the 
knees  greatly  flexed,  because  this  hinders  one  in  making  the  turn. 

Don't  forget  to  hold  the  correct  starting  position  for  a  short  time 
before  and  after  the  turn,  because  this  gives  greater  confidence  and 
control. 


Exercise  12.  Analysis  of  the  Back  Push-Off. 

After  learning  the  above  exercises  the  novice  is  ready  for  the  first 
step  in  learning  to  swim  on  the  back. 

AVATER   DRILL, 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Face  the  side  of  the  tank;  grasp  the  railing;  submerge  the  shoulders. 
Place  the  soles  of  both  feet  against  the  side  of  the  tank  and  as  near  water 
surface  as   possible.     Fig.  4.   Page  Z7. 

(1)  Inhale,  and  head — Back! 

Take  a  deep  inhalation  through  the  mouth,  place  the  head  back  in  the 
water,  ears  submerged. 

(2)  Push-off! 

Let  go  of  the  railing  bringing  both  arms  to  the  side  of  the  body,  at  the 
same  time  push  away  from  the  side  of  the  tank,  by  extending  the  flexed 
legs.     Fig.   5.   Page  2)7. 

(3)  Glide! 

If  executed  correctly  the  body  will  glide  forward  in  the  true  floating 
position.  When  the  momentum  of  the  glide  has  nearly  ceased  the  arms 
should  be  slowly  brought  to  the  side  horizontal  position,  as  balance  is 
more  easily  maintained,   in  this  position.     Fig.   5.   Page  27. 

(4)  Starting  position — Take! 

Regain  standing  position  as  described  in  exercise  eight. 

DON'T 

Don't  throw  the  head  too  far  back  and  arch  the  body  backward,  be- 
cause this  will  direct  the  body's  course  toward  the  bottom  of  the  pool. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  41 

Don't,  on  the  other  hand,  hold  the  head  too  far  forward  and  bend 
the  body,  sinking  the  hips,  because  this  checks  the  forward  glide. 

Don't  bring  the  arms  high  out  of  the  water  when  pushing  away,  as 
this  tends  to  sink  the  body. 


Exercise  13.  Advanced  Ways  of  Floating. 

When  you  are  able  to  float  in  the  true  floating  position  correctly,  learn 
these  more  difficult  floating  positions  as  a  means  of  giving  confidence  and 
control  of  the  body, 

WATER  DRILL, 
FIRST  WATER  DRILL. 

Horizontal  Floating. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Assume  correct  true  floating  position  as  described,  in  addition  have  the 
legs  extended,  heels  and  knees  touching. 

(1)  Arms  to  vertical — Place! 

Slowly  change  the  arm  position  from  side  horizontal  to  vertical, 
thumbs  touching,  backs  of  the  hands  resting  on  the  water  surface.  Hold 
this  position  for  a  little  while.     Fig.  6.  Page  2>7. 

(2)  Hands  on  neck — Place! 

Slowly  change  the  arm  position  vertical  to  the  arms  flexed  position, 
fingers  touching  the  back  of  the  neck. 

(3)  Arms  at  side — Place! 

Slowly  change  the  arms  from  the  flexed  position  to  the  extended 
positions,  palms  touching  the  sides  of  the  body.     Fig.  5.  Page  37. 

SECOND   WATER   DRILL. 

Vertical  Floating. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

While  in  deep  water  assume  correct  true  floating  position. 

(4)  Head  forward — Place  ! 

Slowly  assume  the  vertical  floating  position  by  permitting  the  head  to 
come  a  little  further  forward,  thus  allowing  the  feet  to  sink.  The  position 
of  the  head  in  the  water  that  is,  forward  or  backward,  greatly  determines 
the  lowering  or  raising  of  the  feet. 


42  SiriMMIXG  SIMPLIFIED 

Having  learned  the  above  exercises  the  novice  is  now  ready  to  master 
the  most  sim])le  of  strokes,  the  Elementar\'  Back  Stroke  or  Prehminary 
Crawl. 

Refer  to  instructors'  notes,   Body  Balance,  exercise  thirteen,  page   162. 

DON'T 

Don't  forget  to  breathe  naturall}-,  because  deep  inhalations  insure 
contidence  while  floating  and  give  added  buoyancy  to  the  body. 

Don't  attempt  advanced  horizontal  floating  with  the  head  held  high 
or  forward,  as  this  tends  to  sink  the  feet. 

Don't  raise  the  arms  high  out  of  the  water,  because  this  sinks  the 
f;ody. 

Don't  relax  the  l)ack  assuming  a  sitting  position,  because  this  sinks 
the  body. 

Don't  hold  the  body  rigid  while  floating,  because  this  is  fatiguing 
and    ditificult. 

Don't  forcibly  change  the  arm  positions,  as  this  temporarily  dis- 
turbs body  balance. 

Don't  change  the  head  position  too  quickly  in  vertical  floating,  as 
it  may  submerge  the  entire  body. 


sir  I  MM  INC  SIMriJilliD  43 

III 
ANALYSIS  OF  THE  VARIOUS  SWIMMIXG  STROKES 

In  learning  or  teaching  any  one  of  the  swimming  strokes,  the  following- 
cardinal  points  cannot  be  over  emphasized. 

(1  )   Breathe  correctly  and  at  the  pr()i)er  time. 

(2)  W'lien  hreatliing  do  not  lift  ihe  head  high  out  of  the  water  hut  turn 
it  to  the  side,  raising  the  mouth  sufficiently  to  clear  the  water  surface.  In 
the  breast  stroke,  the  breath  m.ay  be  obtained  from  the  front  by  raising 
the  head. 

(3)  Avoid  carrying  the  head  high  out  of  the  water,  because  this  lowers 
the  feet  and  causes  the  body  to  drag. 

(4)  Keep  the  body  parallel  with  and  as  near  the  water  surface  as  pos- 
sible, thus  offering  less  resistance. 

(5)  Employ  the  correct  coordination  of  the  stroke  under  consideration. 

(6)  Force  should  be  expended  only  during  the  arm  pull  and  leg  drive 
which  propells  the  body  forward.  Upon  recovery  of  the  stroke,  the  body 
must  be  relaxed,  and  no  force  whatever  exerted  in  order  to  miminize  re- 
sistance. 

THE  ELEMENTARY  BACK  STROKE 

This  stroke  is  of  value  as  a  means  of  resting  the  body  and  in  life-sav- 
ing. 

It  is  our  opinion  that  having  learned  to  float  the  natural  and  logical 
progression  for  the  great  majority,  especially  girls  and  women,  is  the  ele- 
mentary back  stroke.  This  stroke  is  an  outgrowth  of  the  fundamental  po- 
sitions used  in  true  floating.  Furthermore  having  overcome  the  fear  of  the 
•water,  having  learned  to  breathe  correctly  and  to  balance  the  body  in  the 
horizontal  position,  it  is  a  simple  matter  to  learn  the  coordination  of  these 
very  elementary  arm  an.d  leg  motions. 

Most  instructors  advocate  that  the  beginners  first  lesson  should  consist 
of  the  crawl,  breast  or  side  strokes.  By  such  a  method  the  beginner,  in  ad- 
dition to  learning  the  already  complicated  stroke,  must  also  overcome  the 
fear  of  the  water,  learn  to  Ijreathe,  and  to  balance  the  body.  This  is  con- 
trary to  our  mental  and  motor  \)rocesses,  that  is,  progressing  from  the  sim- 
ple to  the  complex. 


44  SU'IMMIXG  SIMPLIFIED 

The  progressive  steps  in  learning  or  teaching  this  stroke  are  : 

(1)  Careful  analysis  of  the  land  drills,  arm  motions. 

(2)  Application  of  the  above  land  drills,  arm  motions  in  the  water. 

(3)  Careful  analysis  of  the  land  drills,  leg  motions. 

(4)  Application  of  the  above  land  drills,  leg  motions  in  the  water. 

(5)  Careful  analysis  of  the  land  drills,  combined  arm  and  leg  motions. 

(6)  Application  of  the  above  land  drills,  combination  of  the  arm  and 
leg  motions  in  the  water. 

Refer  to  the  cardinal  points  concerning  swimming,  page  43. 


LAND  DRILL, 

Breathing. 

Inhale  through  the  mouth  on  counts  One !  and  Two  !  and  exhale  through 
the  nose  on  counts  Three !  and  Four ! 

FIRST   LAND  DRILL. 

1.  Arm  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

The  starting  position  for  the  first  land  drill  is  as  follows  : 
Stand,   body   erect,   arms   at   the   side   of   the   body,    feet   together.     Fig.   3. 
Page  45. 

Up  easily,  inhale — One  ! 

Slowly  bring  the  hands  up  to  the  shoulders,  fingers  pointing  down  fol- 
lowing an  imaginary  line  along  the  side,  elbows  close  to  the  body.  Fig.  1. 
Page  45. 

Out  easily,  inhale — Two! 

Slowly  extend  the  arms  to  the  side  hori/^ontal  position,  palms  down. 
Fig.  2.  Page  45. 

Down  forcibly,  exhale — Three! 

Forcibly  bring  the  extended  arms  down  to  the  side  of  the  body.  Fig. 
3.   Page  45. 

Hold,  exhale — Four! 

This  count  is  the  same  as  the  starting  position. 

Motion  Picture  Land  Drill. 

Practice  the  above  land  drill,  taking  one  step  backward  during  the 
arm  pull,  or  count  Three!  This  serves  as  a  motion  picture  land  drill, 
illustrating  the  propelling  power  of  the  stroke. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


The    Elementary    Back    Stroke.      Figs. 

The    Elementary    Back    Stroke.      Figs. 

One!   Two!   and  Three!  of   the  land   dril 


1,  2  and  3.  Illustrate  counts 
1,  2  and  3.  Illustrate  counts 
.     Figs.  4,   5   and  6.     Illustrate 


46  SJflMMIXir  SJMPLIPIIilJ 

2.  Leg  Motion. 

Up  easily,  inhale — One! 

Slowly  bring  the  sole  of  one  foot  up  along  the  side  of  the  support- 
ing leg,  keeping  the  knee  well  back.     Fig.  1.   Page  45. 
Out  forcibly,  inhale — Two! 

Flex  the  ankle  and  forcibly  extend  the  legi  to  the  side.     Fig.  2.  Page  45. 
Together  forcibly,  exhale — Three  ! 

Forcibly  bring  the  leg  to  starting  position.     Fig.  3.  Page  45. 
Hold,  exhale — Four! 
This  count  is  the  same  as  starting  position. 

3.  Combination  of  Arm  and  Leg  Motions— The  Coordinated  Stroke. 

The  coordination  of  the  elementary  back  stroke  consists  of  the 
combination  of  arm  and  leg  motions,  according  to  counts  One!  Two! 
Three!  and  Four!  Figs.  1.  2  and  3.  Page  45. 

Up  both,  inhale — One! 

Out  both,  inhale — Two  ! 

Down  and  together  both,  exhale — Three ! 

Hold  both,  exhale — Four! 


SECOND  LAND   DRILL. 

L  Arm  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take! 

Starting  position  for  the  second  land  drill  is  as  follows:  Lie  on  the 
back,  body  extended,  arms  at  the  side,  feet  together. 

In  order  to  get  a  clearer  idea  of  the  position  of  the  body  while  in 
the  water,  practice  the  second  land  drill. 

Up  easily,  inhale — One! 

Counts  One!  Two!  Three!  and  Four!  of  the  arm  motion,  arc  described 
in  the  first  land  drill. 

Out  easily,  inhale — Two! 

Down  forcibly,  exhale — Three! 

Hold,  exhale — Four! 

2.  Leg  Motion. 

L^p  easily,  inhale — One! 

Slowly  bend  the  knees,  separating  as  far  apart  as  possible,  heels  touch- 
ing, toes  pointed. 

Out  forcibly,  inhale — Twf^ ! 

Flex  the  ankles  and  forcil)ly  extend  the  legs  to  the  side. 


Sir/MMIXC  SI  MP  LI  I' I  III)  47 

Together  forcibly,  exhale — Three! 
Forcibly  bring  the  legs  together. 
Hold,  exhale — Four! 
This  count  is  the  same  as  starting-  position. 

3.  Combination  of  Arm  and  Leg  Motions— The  Coordinated  Stroke. 

The  coordination   of   the   element ar_\-   hack   stroke   taken   lying   down   is 
the  same  as  described  in  the  first  land  drill. 
Up  both,  inhale^ — One! 
Out  both,  inhale — Two! 
Down  and  together  both,  exhale — Three! 
Hold,  exhale — Four! 

Important  NciTE. —  Counts  One!  and  Two!,  the  recovery  of  the  arm 
motion,  must  be  executed  slowly  and  easily,  as  force  applied  here  would 
check  body's  glide.  Count  Three!,  the  pull  of  the  arm  motion,  must  be 
executed  forcibly  in  order  to  propel  the  body  forward.  During  count 
h^our!  the  body  glides  forward  oii  the  momentum  gained  from  the  arm 
pull. 

Count  One!,  the  recovery  of  the  leg  movement,  must  be  executed 
slowly  and  easily,  remembering  to  slightly  flex  the  knees,  keeping  them 
submerged  and  apart.  Counts  Two!  and  Three!,  the  leg  drive,  niust  be 
executed  forcibly  and  in  a  continuous  circular  motion. 


WATER   DRILL, 

Breathing. 

Inhale  through  the  mouth  on  counts  One!  and  Two!  and  exhale 
through  the  nose  on  counts  Three!  and  Four!  The  breathing  should  be 
natural,  and  not  forced. 

FIRST   AVATKR   DRILL. 

1.  Arm  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take! 

Stand  in  shallow  end  of  pool;  shoulders  submerged.  Then  assume 
the  correct  starting  position  of  the  arms  as  already  described. 

Up  easily,  inhale — One! 

Practice  the  arm  motion  with  l)reathing  as  described  in  the  land 
drills. 

Out  easily,  inhale — Two! 

Down  forcibly,  inhale — Three! 


48  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

SECOND  WATER  DRILL. 

Starting  position — Take! 

Start  from  the  back-push-off  position.  Fig.  4.  Page  37.  Then  push 
away  from  the  side  of  the  tank  and  remain  in  correct  true  floating  posi- 
tion, until  the  body  nearly  ceases  its  forward  glide.  Keep  the  head  well 
back,  chin  in,  arms  at  the  side  of  body,  and  feet  together. 

Up  easily,  inhale — One! 

Begin  swimming  with  the  arms  alone  as  described  in  the  land  and 
water  drills. 

Out  easily,  inhale — Two! 

Down  forcibly,  exhale — Three  ! 

Hold,  exhale — Four! 

Important  NoTE.^Having  executed  a  few  strokes,  regain  standing  po- 
sition. Practice  this  arm  motion  until  it  is  executed  correctly  and  with 
ease. 

FIRST  AVATER  DRILL. 

2.  Leg  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take! 

Stand  with  the  back  to  the  side  of  the  tank;  submerge  the  shoulders; 
grasp  the  railing  by  means  of  the  overhand  grasp;  hands  far  apart;  as- 
sume true  floating  position.     Fig.  4.   Page  29. 

Up  easily,  inhale — One! 

Practice  the  leg  motion  a?  described  in  the  second  land  drill,  and  re- 
fer to  the  important  note  at  the  end  of  that  drill. 

Out  forcibly,  inhale — Two! 

Together  forcibly,  exhale — Three! 

Flold,  exhale — Four! 

SECOND  WATER   DRILL. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Start  from  the  back-push-off  position;  push  away;  assume  correct 
true  floating  position;  place  the  hands  on  the  hips. 

Up  easily,  inhale — One! 

Begin  swimming  with  the  legs  alone,  as  described  in  the  land  and 
water  drills. 

Out  forcibly,  inhale — Two! 

Together  forcibly,  exhale — Three! 

Hold,  exhale— Four! 

Important  Note. — Refer  to  the  note  of  the  second  water  drill,  arm 
motion. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


The    Elementary    Back    Stroke.     Figs.    1,    2    and    3.     Class    drills. 
Fig.  4.     Sculling. 


50  SJJ'IMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

3.  Combination  of  the  Arm  and  Leg  Motions— The  Coordinated  Stroke. 

Starting  position — Take! 

This  starting-  position  is  the  same  as  described  for  the  arm  motion, 
second  water  drill. 

Up  both,  inhale — One! 

Begin  swimming  with  the  arms  and  legs  together  as  described  under 
the  coordinated  stroke  of  the  above  land  drills.     Figs.  4,  5  and  6.  Page  45. 

Out  both,  inhale — Two  ! 

Down  and  together,  exhale — Three! 

Hold,  exhale — Four! 

Important  Note. — Having  executed  a' few  strokes  regain  standing  po- 
sition. While  swimming  this  stroke  counts  One!.  Two!  and  Three! 
should  comprise  one  continuous  motion.  During  count  Four!  rest,  and 
glide  forward  on  the  momentum  gained. 

After  the  novice  has  learned  to  breathe  b^'  inhaling  through  the 
mouth,  and  exhaling  through  the  nose,  which  is  according  to  the  cor- 
rect breathing  method  used  in  most  swimming  strokes,  the  beginner 
may  close  the  mouth  and  breathe  naturally  if  desired. 

Having  mastered  the  abo\e  stroke,  the  beginner  is  now  ready  to 
swim  the  elementary  back  stroke  with  greater  speed  by  omitting  count 
Four  !  or  the  glide  and  emphasize  the  arm  pull. 

Refer  to  instructors'  note  for  the  elementary  back  stroke,  page  163. 


DON'T 

Don't  attempt  to  swim   the  elementary  back   stroke   \\ith   the   head 
forward,  because  this  tends  to  sink  the  feet. 

Don't  execute  count  One!  moving  the  elbows  away  from  the  side  of 
the  body,  because  this  slightly  impedes  progress. 

Don't  raise  the  knees  high  out  of  the  water  and  keep  them  close  to- 
gether, because  this  retards  progress  and  tends  to  sink  the  body. 

Don't  use  too  rapid  or  jerky  arm  and  leg  motions,  because  this  fa- 
tigues one  and  impedes  progress. 

Don't  forget  to  apph'  power  on  the  third  count,  because  force  is  nec- 
essar}'  ■^i^,  propell  the  body  forwai  d. 

Don't  attempt  to  swim  the  elementary  back  stroke  with  the  body  in 
a  half  sitting  position,  because  this  retards  progress  and  sinks  the  body. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLII'IIiD  51 

THE  SHEFFIELD  SCULLING  STROKE 

This  stroke  is  of  value  as  a  means  of  resting  the  body  and  inspiring 
the  novice  with  additional  confidence.  The  Sheffield  sculling  stroke  is  an 
outgrowth  of  the  elementary  back  stroke,  and  is  a  modification  of  the 
sculling  stroke.    It  is  of  further  value  because  of  its  simple  arm  motion. 

The  progressive  steps  in  learning  or  teaching  this  stroke  are  : 

(1)  Careful  analysis  of  the  land  drills,  arm  rnotions. 

(2)  Application  of  the  above  land  drills,  arm  motions,  in  water. 

(3)  Careful  analysis  of  the  land  drills,  leg  motions. 

(4)  Application  of  the  above  land  drills,  leg  motions,  in  the  water. 

(5)  Careful  analysis  of  the  land  drills,  combined  arm  and  leg  motions. 

(6)  Application    of    the    above    land    drills,    combined    arm    and    leg 
motions,  in  the  water. 

Refer  to  the  cardinal  points  concerning  swimming,  page  43. 


LAND   DRILL 

Breathing. 

Inhale  through  the  mouth  on  count  One !  and  exhale  through  the  nose 
on  count  Two ! 

FIRST  LAND  DRILL. 

1.  Arm  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

The  starting  position  for  the  first  land  drill  is  as  follows  :  Stand,  body 
erect,  arms  at  the  side  of  the  body,  palms  forward,  fingers  together. 

Up  easily,  inhale — One  ! 

Slowly  bring  the  hands  up  to  the  waist  line,  palms  forward,  the  small 
fingers  following  an  imaginary  line  along  the  side  of  the  body.  Fig.  1. 
Page  53. 

Down  forcibly,  exhale — Two  ! 

Then  forcibly  push  down  out  and  out  by  extending  the  elbows  and  turn- 
ing the  palms  of  the  hands  down.     Fig.  2.  Page  53. 

Motion  Picture  Land  Drill, 

Practice  the  above  land  drill,  taking  one  step  backward  during  the  arm 
drive,  or  count  Two !  This  serves  as  a  mot'on  picture  land  drill,  illustrat- 
ing the  propelling  power  of  the  stroke. 


52  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

2.  Leg  Motion. 

Left  leg  kick,  inhale — One! 

Raise  the  extended  left  leg  forward  about  six  inches,  toes  pointed ; 
replace  it. 

Right  leg  kick,  exhale — Two  ! 

Repeat  count  One !  substituting  the  right  leg. 

Important  Note. — Having  learned  the  above  drill,  practice  it  using 
from  four  to  six  beats  to  the  complete  arm  motion.  Each  downward  leg 
movement  constitutes  a  beat. 

3.  Combination  of  Arm  and  Leg  Motions — The  Coordinated  Stroke. 

The  coordination  of  the  Sheffield  sculling  stroke  consists  of  the  com- 
bination of  the  arm  and  leg  motions,  according  to  counts  One!  and  Two! 
Up  easily,  kick,  inhale — One  ! 
Down  forcibly,  kick,  exhale — Two  ! 

SECOND  LAM)   DRILL,. 

1.  Arm  Motion. 

Sta-rting  position — Take  ! 

The  starting  position  for  the  second  land  drill  is  as  follows :  Lie  on 
the  back,  body  extended,  arms  at  the  side,  palms  up,  feet  together  and  over 
the  edge  of  the  pool. 

Up  easily,  inhale — One  ! 

Counts  One!  and  Two!  of  the  arm  motion  are  the  same  as  described 
in  the  first  land  drill. 

Down  forcibly,  exhale — Two  ! 

2.  Leg  Motion. 

Crawl  kick,  inhale — One  ! 

Practice  the  alternate  up  and  down  leg  thrash  while  on  the  back,  with 
a  drive  of  from  eight  to  fourteen  inches,  keeping  the  legs  and  ankles  ex- 
tended though  slightly  relaxed.  Use  from  two  to  four  leg  thrashes  or 
beats  during  each  count. 

Crawl  kick,  exhale — Two  ! 

Repeat  count  One ! 

3.  Combination  of  Arm  and  Leg  Motions — The  Coordinated  Stroke. 

The  coordination  of  the  Sheffield  sculling  stroke  taken  lying  down  is 
the  same  as  described  in  the  first  land  drill,  except  that  more  leg  thrashes 
or  kicks  varying  from  two  to  four  are  given  to  each  count. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


53 


mki%mim%t1i 


The  Sheffield  Sculling  Stroke.  Figs.  1  and  2.  Illustrate  counts 
One!  and  Two!  of  the  land  drill.  Figs.  3  and  4.  Illustrate  counts 
One!  and  Two  I  of  the  water  drill.     Figs.  5  and  6.     Class  Drill. 


54  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

Up  easily,  kick,  inhale — One  ! 
Down  forcibly,  kick,  exhale — Two  ! 

Important  Note. — Count  One!  which  constitutes  the  recovery  of  the 
arm  motion,  must  be  executed  slowly  and  easily,  as  force  applied  here 
would  check  the  body's  progress.  Count  Two  !,  which  constitutes  the  arm 
pull,  must  be  executed  forcibly  in  order  to  propell  the  body  forward. 

During  counts  One!  and  Two!  of  the  arm  motion  there  are  from  two 
to  eight  leg  thrashes  or  beats,  depending  upon  the  ability  of  the  novice. 
Bend  the  knees  slightly  and  point  the  toes.  The  faster  the  legs  drive  the 
greater  will  be  the  speed  obtained. 


WATER   DRILL 

Breathing. 

Inhale  through  the  mouth  on  count  One !  and  exhale  through  the  nose 
on  count  Two  !     The  breathing  should  be  natural  and  not  forced. 


FIRST  WATER  DRILL. 

1.  Arm  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand  in  the  shallow  end  of  the  pool ;  submerge  the  shoulders.     Then 
assume  the  correct  starting  position  of  the  arms  as  already  described. 
Up  easily,  inhale — One  ! 

Practice  the  arm  motion  with  breathing  as  described  in  the  land  drills. 
Down  forcibly,  exhale — Two  ! 


SECOND   WATER   DRILL. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Start  from  the  back  push-ofif.  Fig.  4.  Page  Z7.  Then  push  away  from 
the  side  of  the  tank  and  remain  in  correct  true  floating  position,  until  the 
body  nearly  ceases  its  forward  glide.  Keep  the  head  well  back,  chin  in,  arms 
at  the  side  of  the  body,   feet  together.     Fig.  5.  Page  37. 

Up  easily,  inhale — One  ! 

Begin  swimming  on  the  back  with  the  arms  alone  as  described  in  the 
above  land   drills.     Fig.  3.   Page   53. 

Down  forcibly,  exhale — Two  ! 

Fig.  4.  Page  53.  Important  Note. — Having  executed  a  few  strokes,  re- 
gain standing  position.  Practice  this  arm  motion  until  it  is  executed  cor- 
rectly and  with  ease. 


SiriMMING  SIMPLII'jHJJ  55 

FIRST  AVATER   DRILL. 

2.  Leg  Motion 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand  with  the  back  to  the  side  of  the  pool,  submerge  the  shoulders; 
grasp  the  railing  by  means  of  the  overhand  grasp  ;  assume  true  floating 
position.     Fig.  4.  Page  29. 

Crawl-kick,  inhale — One  ! 

Crawl-kick,  exhale — Two  ! 

Practice  the  alternate  up  and  down  leg  thrashes  as  described  in  the 
second  land  drill. 

SECOND  AVATER   DRILL. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Start  from  the  back-push-off;  push  away;  assume  correct  true  float- 
ing position  ;  then  place  the  hands  on  the  hips. 
Crawl-kick,  inhale — One! 

Begin  swimming  with  the  legs  alone  as  described  in  the  first  water  drill. 
Crawl  kick,  exhale — Two  ! 

Important  Note. — Be  careful  not  to  bend  the  knees  noticeably  and  flex 
the  ankles.  Practice  this  leg  motion  until  it  is  executed  correctly  and  with 
ease. 

3.  Combination  of  Arm  and  Leg  Motions — The  Coordinated  Stroke 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

The  starting  position  is  the  same  as  described  in  the  second  water  drill, 
arm  motion. 

Up  easily,  kick,  inhale — One  ! 

Begin  swimming  with  the  arms  and  legs  together  as  described  under 
the  corodinated  stroke  in  the  above  land  drills.     Fig.  3,  Page  53. 

Down  forcibly,  kick,  exhale — Two ! 

Fig.  4.  Page  53.  Important  Note. — If  the  novice  desires  to  learn  the  or- 
dinary sculling  motion,  he  should  practice  the  following  drill.  This  sculling 
stroke  consists  of  a  rapid  circular  motion  of  arms.  This  arm  motion  is  ex- 
ecuted by  first  forcibly  and  quickly  bringing  the  palms  of  both  hands  tow- 
ard the  side  of  the  body,  thumbs  up,  then  quickly  turning  the  palms  of  the 
hands  away  from  the  body,  thumbs  down.  During  this  movement  the  el- 
bows are  slightly  flexed.  This  sculling  stroke  may  also  be  executed  with 
a  fast  crawl  leg  kick.     Fig.  4.  Page  49. 

After  the  novice  has  learned  to  breathe  by  inhaling  through  the  mouth 
and  exhaling  through  the  nose,  which  is  according  to  the  correct  breathing 


56  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

method   used   in   most   swimming   strokes,   he   may   close   the   mouth   and 
breathe  naturally  if  desired. 

Refer  to  the  instructors'  note  for  the  Sheffield  sculling  stroke,  page  163. 


DON'T 

Don't  attempt  to  swim  the  Sheffield  sculling  stroke  with  the  head 
high  out  of  the  water  or  held  forward,  because  this  sinks  the  feet. 

Don't  bring  the  arms  up  forcibly  on  count  One!,  because  this  im- 
pedes progress. 

Don't  noticeal)ly  bend  or  raise  the  knees  high  out  of  the  water,  be- 
cause this  retards  progress. 

Don't  attempt  the  crawl-kick  without  pointing  the  toes,  because  this 
limits  the  force  of  the  kick. 

Don't  attempt  to  swim  this  stroke  with  the  body  in  half  sitting  po- 
sition, because  this  impedes  progress  and  tends  to  sink  the  body. 


THE  UNDER-ARM-SIDE-STROKE 

This  is  of  value  in  long  distance  swimming  and  is  useful  m  life-saving. 

The  under-arm-side  stroke  is  next  in  progression  because  of  its  simple 
coordination  and  slight  change  in  body  position.  Furthermore,  it  is  the 
foundation  stroke  for  the  single-over-arm-side  stroke,  the  trudgeon,  the 
trudgeon-crawl  and  the  crawl. 

The  progressive  steps  in  learning  or  teaching  this  stroke  are : 

(1)  Review  the  side-push-off. 

(2)  Careful  analysis  of  the  land  drills,  arm  motions. 

(3)  Application  of  the  above  land  drills,  arm  motions,  in  water. 

(4)  Careful  analysis  of  the  land  drills,  leg  motions,  or  the  scissor  kick. 

(5)  Application  of  the  above  land  drills,  leg  motions,  in  the  water. 

(6)  Careful  analysis  of  the  land  drill,  combined  arm  and  leg  motions. 

(7)  Application  of  the  above  land  drills,  combined  arm  and  leg  motions, 
in  the  water. 

Refer  to  the  cardinal  points  concerning  swimming,  page  43. 

I.AND   DRILL 

Breathing. 

Exhale  through  the  nose  on  count  One!  and  inhale  through  the  mouth 
on  counts  Two  !  and  Three  ! 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


57 


The  Under-Arm-Side-Stroke.      Figs.    1.  2,  3  and   4.      Illustrate  counts 
One!  and  Two!  of  the  land  drill.    Figs.  5  and  6.    Class  drill. 


58  SIVIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

FIRST   T.AXI>  DKII^l,. 

1.  Arm  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

The  starting  position  for  the  first  land  drill  is  as  follows  :  Stand,  body 
erect,  feet  together,  right  arm  extended  to  vertical  position  and  close  to 
the  head,  palms  i/Ut,  the  extended  left  arm  at  the  side,  thumb  touching 
the  body,  head  turned  slightly  towards  the  left  shoulder.  Fig.  1.  Page  57. 
This  entire  stroke  is  analyzed  for  a  person  swimming  on  the  right  side, 
therefore  the  reverse  would  apply  for  one  swimming  on  the  left  side. 

Pull  right,  cross  left,  exhale — One! 

While  the  extended  right  arm  is  forcibly  pulling  down  towards  the 
right  side  of  the  body  and  finishing  with  the  hand  near  the  right  shoulder; 
the  left  arm  is  slowly  being  brought  up  across  the  chest  and  close  to  the 
body,  meeting  the  right  hand.     Figs.  2  and  3.  Page  57. 

Pull  left,  exteiid  right,  inhale — Two  ! 

While  the  right  arm  is  slowly  being  extended  to  the  vertical  position, 
palm  out,  the  left  arm  is  forcibly  pulling  down  across  the  chest  and  close 
to  the  body,  finishing  at  the  side.     Figs.  4  and  1,  Page  57. 

Hold,  exhale — Three  ! 

This  count  is  the  same  at  starting  position.     Fig.  1.  P.age  57. 


Motion  Picture  Land  Drill. 

Practice  the  above  land  drill  taking  two  steps  in  the  line  of  direction  ; 
that  is,  two  steps  forward  right  side  of  body  leading  during  each  arm  pull. 
This  serves  as  a  motion  picture  land  drill,  illustrating  the  propelling  power 
of  the  stroke. 


FIRST   LAND  DRILI.. 

2.  Leg  Motion. 

Legs  hold,  exhale — One  ! 

Stand,  body  erect,  hands  on  hips. 

Open  easily,  snap  together,  inhale — Two ! 

Practice  the  kick,  first  using  the  upper  or  left  leg,  then  the  lower  or 
right  leg.  Raise  the  extended  left  leg  forward  about  eight  inches,  ankles 
slightly  flexed;  replace  the  foot  forcibly,  toes  pointed.  Figs.  4  and  1.  Page, 
57.  Then  raise  the  slightly  flexed  right  leg  about  eight  inches  to  the  rear; 
forcibly   replace   it,    toes   pointed. 

Hold,  inhale — Three  ! 

This  count  is  the  same  as  count  One  !  of  this  drill. 


SiriMMIXa  SlMPLIl'IHIj  59 

SECOND  I.AND   I)KII>T.. 

Starting  position — Take! 

Lie  on  the  right  side,  legs  extended,  heels  and  knees  touching,  ankles 
slightly  flexed,  arms  in  starting  position. 

In  order  to  get  a  clearer  idea  of  the  position  of  the  body  while  in  the 
water  and  a  more  accurate  analysis  of  the  scissor-kick,  i)ractice  the  second 
land  drill.  It  is  very  difficult  to  practice  the  land  drill  for  the  arm  n'otion 
lying  down,  hence  just  the  leg  mt)tion  is  analyzed  and  the  rest  of  the  stroke 
learned  standing. 

Legs  hold,  exhale — One  ! 

This  count  is  the  same  as  starting-  i)osition. 

Open  easily,  snap  together,  inhale — Two ! 

Slowly  and  easily  separate  the  knees  about  eight  inches,  legs  relaxed. 
While  the  upper  or  left  leg  is  being  extended  forward,  ankles  slightly 
flexed,  the  lower  or  right  leg  is  being  slightly  flexed  to  the  rear.  Then  both 
legs  are  forcibly  brought  together  and  remain  in  starting  position.  Fig.  4. 
Page  63. 

Hold,  exhale — Three  ! 

This  count  is  the  same  as  starting-  position. 

3.  Combination  of  Arm  and  Leg  Motions — The  Coordnated  Stroke. 

The  coordination  of  the  under-arm-side  stroke  consist  of  the  combina- 
tion of  the  arm  and  leg  motions  according  to  counts  One!  Two!  and 
Three ! 

Pull  right,  cross  left,  inhale — One! 

Pull  left,  extend  right,  kick,  inhale — Two  ! 

Hold,  exhale — Three  ! 

Figs.  1,  2,  3  and  4.  Page  57.  Important  Note. — While  the  right  arm  is 
forcibly  pulling,  the  relaxed  left  arm  is  recovering,  and  vice  versa.  Open 
the  relaxed  legs  easily  during  the  recovery  and  forcibly  bring  them  togeth- 
er during  the  drive. 

WATER  DRILL 

Breathing.  ^'' 

Exhale  through  the  nose  during  count  One !  and  inhale  through  the 
mouth  during  counts  Two  !  and  Three  !  The  breathing  should  be  natural 
and  not  forced. 

FIRST  WATER  DRILL. 

L  Arm  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 


60  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

Stand  in  the  shallow  end  of  the  pool  shoulders  submerged.  Then  assume 
the  correct  starting  position  for  the  arms  ;  that  is,  right  arm  extended  and 
resting  on  water  surface,  palm  down,  the  extended  left  arm  at  the  side  of 
the  body,  top  of  head  resting  on  right  arm,  and  look  back  slightly  over  left 
shoulder. 

Pull  right,  cross  left,  exhale — One  ! 

In  executing  this  pull  practice  first  with  the  right  arm  and  then  with 
the  left  arm  according  to  the  analysis  given  in  the  land  drill.  When  this  is 
learned  practice  the  complete  arm  motion.  Remember  that  force  should  be 
exerted  only  during  the  drive  or  pull  of  the  stroke  and  that  the  arms  alter- 
nate in  their  pull ;  that  is,  first  the  right  arm  pulls  while  the  left  arm  is 
slowly  recovering,  then  the  left  arm  pulls  while  the  right  arm  is  slowly  re- 
covering. 

Pull  left,  extend  right,  inhale— Two ! 

Hold,  inhale — Three  ! 


SECOND   WATER   DRILL. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Start  from  the  side-push-otT.  Figs.  2  and  3.  Page  37.  Push  away  and 
remain  in  a  correct  side-push-off  position  until  the  body  almost  ceas'es  its 
forward  glide. 

Pull  right,  cross  left,  exhale— One ! 

After  the  side-push-off,  begin  swimming  with  the  arms  alone  as  des- 
cribed in  the  above  drills. 

Pull  left,  extend  right,  inhale— Two ! 

Hold,  inhale — Three  ! 

After  executing  a  few  strokes  regain  standing  position.  Practice  this 
drill  until  it  is  executed  correctly  and  with  ease. 

Important  Note.— The  body  may  sink  a  little  at  first,  because  of  the 
more  difficult  side  position,  and  because  of  using  the  arms  only.  If  such 
be  the  case,  employ  faster  arm  motion,  and  do  not  hold  the  third  count  so 
long. 

FIRST  WATER   DRILL. 

2.  Leg  Motion. 

Staiting  position — Take! 

The  starting  position  for  the  scissor-kick  is  as  follows  :  Stand  with  the 
right  side  of  the  body  facing  the  side  of  the  tank  or  railing;  submerge  the 
shoulders  ;  grasp  the  railing  with  the  left  hand ;  place  the  palm  of  the  right 
hand  against  the  side  of  the  tank,  about  eight  inches  under  the  water,  with 
the  fingers  pointing  down,  thumb  out.     Then  raise  the  legs  to  the  water 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  61 

surface  and  assume  a  correct  side  position,  body  extended,  heels  and  knees 
touching. 

Hold,  exhale — One  ! 

This  count  is  the  same  as  starting  position. 

Open  easily,  snap  together,  inhale — Two  ! 

In  executing  this  drill  practice  first  with  the  upper  or  left  leg,  then  with 
the  lower  or  right  leg.  When  this  is  learned  practice  the  leg  motion,  using 
both  legs  as  already  described  in  the  second  land  drill,  leg  motion.  In  prac- 
ticing the  scissor-kick  be  careful  not  to  separate  the  knees  more  than  ten 
inches  because  of  the  amount  of  resistance  offered  in  the  wide  spread  of 
the  legs  is  not  correspondingly  compensated  by  the  amount  of  power  gained 
in  the  drive.  Be  careful  not  to  raise  either  foot  out  of  water,  but  to  keep 
legs  parallel  with  and  as  near  the  water  surface  as  possible.  Fig.  4.  Page 
63. 

Hold,  exhale — Three  ! 

SECOND  WATER  DRILL. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

The  starting  position  is  the  same  as  described  for  the  arm  motion,  sec- 
ond water  drill.  Hold  the  arms  in  starting  position  while  practicing  the  scis- 
sor-kick in  this  drill. 

Hold,  exhale — One  ! 

Open  easily,  snap  together,  inhale — Two  ! 

Hold,  inhale — Three  ! 

After  the  side-push-off,  begin  swimming  with  the  legs  alone  as  des- 
cribed in  the  above  drills.  Having  executed  a  few  strokes,  regain  standing 
position. 

Important  NoTE.-^Apply  force  only  as  the  legs  are  brought  together. 
If  the  body  tends  to  sink,  use  a  faster  leg  drive  and  do  not  hold  the  first 
and  third  counts  so  long. 

3.  Combination  of  Arm  and  Leg  Motions — The  Coordinated  Strokes. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

The  starting  position  is  the  same  as  described  for  the  arm  motion,  sec- 
ond water  drill.  Fig.  5.  Page  63. 

Pull  right,  cross  left,  exhale — One  ! 

After  the  side-push-off  begin  swimniii^g  with  the  arms  and  legs  together 
as  described  under  the  coordinated  stroke  in  the  first  land  drill.  Figs.  1  and 
2.  Page  63. 

Pull  left,  extend  right,  kick,  inhale — Two  ! 

Hold,  inhale — Three  ! 


U2  SiriMMIXG  SIMPLIFIED 

Figs.  3  and  1.  Page  63.  Important  Note. — In  order  to  maintain  a  correct 
side-push-off  position,  the  top  of  the  head  must  be  held  low,  and  look  back 
slightly  over  the  left  shoulder,  the  mouth  raised  sufficiently  to  clear  the 
water  surface.  The  alternate  arm  pull  must  be  straight  down  through  the 
water  and  close  to  the  body.  The  correct  timing  or  coordination  of  the 
stroke  may  be  further  simplified  by  remembering  to  inhale  through  the 
mouth  and -open  and  close  the  legs  as  the  upper  or  left  arm  starts  to  pull 
down  across  the  body.  In  other  words,  do  not  kick  or  inhale  until  the  be- 
ginning of  the  second  count. 

After  the  novice  has  learned  to  breathe  by  inhaling  through  the  mouth 
and  exhaling  through  the  nose  which  is  according  to  the  correct  breathing 
method  used  in  most  strokes,  the  novice  may  then  close  the  mouth  and 
breathe  naturally.  Having  mastered  the  above  the  beginner  is  now  ready 
to  swim  the  side  stroke  with  greater  speed,  by  omitting  count  Three !  or 
the  glide  and  emphasizing  each  arm  pull. 

Refer  to  instructors'  note  for  the  under-arm.-side  stroke,  page  164. 


DON'T 

Don't  swim  with  the  head  high  out  of  water,  as  this  is  fatiguing  and 
causes  the  body  to  drag. 

Don't  attempt  to  pull  with  both  arms  at  the  same  time,  because  this 
tends  to  sink  the  bod}^  and  causes  a  jerky  stroke. 

Don't  permit  the  arms  to  pull  in  large  circles  away  from  the  body, 
because  this  is  not  only  a  waste  of  energy  but  turns  the  body  on  the 
chest  or  on  the  back  depending  upon  the  direction  of  the  pull. 

Don't  pull  more  forcibly  wnth  the  under  arm  and  lessen  the  pulling 
force  of  the  upper  arm,  because  this  causes  a  jerky  stroke,  and  on  count 
One!  lifts  the  body  high  out  of  the  water,  and  on  count  Two!  partially 
submerges  it. 

Don't  exert  force  during  the  recover}-  of  the  stroke,  because  this  re- 
tards progress. 

Don't  swim  with  the  knees  flexed,  because  this  slightly  impedes  pro- 
gress. 

Don't  attempt  to  swim  the  side  stroke  in  a  half  forward  or  half 
backward  position,  because  this  disturbs  body  balance  and  offers  great- 
er resistance  to  the  water. 

Don't  inhale  or  kick  until  the  upper  or  left  arm  starts  to  come  down 
through  the  water,  because  this  is  the  correct  timing  or  coordination  of 
the  stroke. 


SJl'IMMIh'G  SIMPI-JflRD 


63 


The  Under-Arm-Sidc-Stroke.  Fig.  1.  The  glide.  Fig.  2.  Finish 
of  count  One!  Fig.  3.  Finish  of  count  Two!  Fig.  4.  Analysis  of 
the  scissor-kick.  Fig.  5.  Class  in  starting  position.  Fig.  6.  Class 
swimming  under-arm-side-stroke. 


64  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

THE  SINGLE-OVER-ARM-SIDE  STROKE 

This  stroke  is  also  of  value  in  life-saving  or  long  distance  swimming. 

Having  learned  the  side  stroke  the  next  in  the  logical  progression  of 
strokes  is  the  single-over-arm-side  stroke.  The  only  difference  between  this 
stroke  and  the  preceding  one  is  that  during  count  One!  the  upper  or  left 
arm  recovers  out  of  the  water,  reaching  as  far  forward  as  possible.  ' 

The  progressive  steps  in  learning  or  teaching  this  stroke  are  the  same 
as  those  given  ''n  the  under-arm-side  stroke. 


LAND  DRILl. 

Breathing. 

Exhale  through  the  nose  on  count  One  !  and  inhale  through  the  mouth 
on  counts  Two  !  and  Three  ! 

1.  Arm  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take  !  ' 

The  starting  position  for  tins  drill  is  as  follows  :  Stand,  bod}-  erect,  feet 
together,  right  arm  extended  to  a  vertical  position  and  close  to  the  head, 
palm  out,  the  extended  left  arm  at  the  side,  thumb  touching  the  body,  head 
erect  and  turned  slightly  towards  the  left  shoulder.     Fig.  1.  Page  57. 

This  entire  stroke  is  analyzed  for  a  person  swimming  on  the  right 
side. 

Pull  right,  cross  over  left,  exhale — One! 

\Miile  the  extended  right  arm  is  forcibly  pulling  dowai  towards  the  side 
of  the  body,  hand  finishing  at  the  right  shoulder;  the  relaxed  left  arm  is  re- 
covering forward  by  raising  the  flexed  elbow  and  keeping  the  wrist  ex- 
tended, hand  low,  finishing  in  a  reach  position  in  front  of  and  away  from 
the  head.     Figs.  1  and  2.  Page  67. 

Pull  left,  extend  right,  inhale — Two ! 

While  the  right  arm  is  slowly  being  extended  to  the  vertical  position, 
palm  out,  the  left  arm  is  forcibly  pulling  down  across  the  chest  and  close 
to  the  body,  finishing  at  the  side.     Fig.  4.  Page  57. 

Hold,  exhale — Three  ! 

This  count  is  the  same  as  starting  position. 

Motion  Picture  Land  Drill. 

Practice  the  above  land  drill  taking  two  steps  in  the  line  of  direction; 
that  is,  two  steps  forward  right  side  of  the  body  leading  during  the  arm 
pull.  This  serves  as  a  motion  picture  land  drill,  illustrating  the  propelling 
power  of  the  stroke. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  65 

2.  Leg  Motion. 
Hold,  exhale — One  ! 

Counts  One!  Two!  and  Three!  of  this  drill  are  the  same  as  described  in 
the  first  and  second  land  drills,  leg  motion,  of  the  under-arm-side  stroke. 
Open  easily,  snap  together,  inhale — Two  ! 
Hold,  inhale — Three  ! 

3.  Combination  of  Arm  and  Leg  Motions — The  Coordinated  Stroke. 

The  coordination  of  the  single-over-arm-side  stroke  consists  of  the 
combination  of  arm  and  leg  motions  according  to  counts  One!  Two!  and 
Three!  The  only  difference  between  this  stroke  and  the  one  preceding  is 
in  the  recovery  of  the  upper  arm. 

Pull  right,  cross  over  left,  exhale — One! 

Pull  left,  extend  right,  kick,  inhale — Two ! 

Hold,  inhale — Three ! 

Important  Note. — While  the  right  arm  is  forcibly  pulling,  the  relaxed 
left  arm  is  recovering,  and  vice  versa.  Open  the  legs  eastily  during  the  re- 
covery and  forcibly  bring  them  together  during  the  drive. 


WATER  DBIIil. 

Breathing. 

Exhale  through  the  nose  on  count  One !  and  inhale  through  the  mouth 
on  count  Two  !  The  breathing  should  be  natural,  not  forced. 

FIRST  WATER  DRIL.L,. 

1.  Arm  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take! 

The  starting  position  for  the  first  and  second  water  drills  is  as  follows : 
Stand  in  the  shallow  end  of  the  pool,  shoulders  submerged.  Then  assume 
the  correct  starting  position  for  the  arm  motion,  right  arm  extended  about 
six  inches  under  the  water  surface,  palm  down,  the  left  arm  extended  to 
the'  rear,  back  of  hand  resting  on  water  surface,  elbow  slightly  flexed  and 
relaxed  ready  for  the  recovery,  top  of  head  resting  on  right  arm,  and  look 
back  slightly  over  left  shoulder. 

The  first  water  drill  is  a  detailed  analysis  of  the  upper  arm  during  the 
complete  stroke. 

Upper  arm — Bend  ! 

The  recovery  of  the  upper  or  left  arm  is  simplified  by  first  raising 
flexed  elbow  high  enough  to  bring  the  extended  wrist  and  lowered  hand 
forward  just  above  water  surface. 


66  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

Upper  arm  in  position  for  the  catch — Place ! 

Start  the  stroke  by  extending  the  hand  about  six  inches  under  the  water 
to  a  reach  position  and  without  aUering  the  side  position  of  the  body. 

Upper  arm — Pull ! 

The  arm  pull  or  drive  is  executed  forcibly  and  the  direction  of  the  pull 
is  straight  down  through  the  water  and  close  to  the  body. 

Upper  arm  in  position  for  the  finish — Place ! 

The  finish  of  the  stroke  is  executed  with  the  arm  extended  to  the  rear, 
back  of  hand  resting  on  water  surface,  elbows  slightly  flexed  and  arm  re- 
laxed. 

Repeat  this  drill  until  it  is  mastered  and  the  recovery  of  the  upper  arm 
out  of  water  becomes  easy  and  natural. 

SECOND  AVATER   DRILL. 

Pull  right,  cross  over  left,  exhale — One  ! 

Practice  the  complete  arm  motion,   applying  the  description   given  in 
the  preceeding  drills.  Then  practice  the  arm  motion  with  breathing. 
Pull  left,  extend  right,  inhale — Two ! 
Hold,  exhale — Three  ! 
Practice  this  drill  until  it  is  executed  correctly  and  with  ease. 

FIRST  AND  SECOND  WATER  DRILLS. 

2.  Leg  Motion. 

Hold,  exhale — One  ! 

Counts  One!  Two!  and  Three!  of  this  drill  are  the  same  as  described 
in  the  first  and  second  water  drills,  leg  motion,  of  the  under-arm-side 
stroke. 

Open  easily,  snap  together,inhale — Two  ! 

Hold,  exhale — Three  1 

3.  Combination  of  Arm  and  Leg  Motions — The  Coordinated  Stroke. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Start  from  the  side-push-off  position.  Push  away  and  remain  in  cor- 
rect side  position  until  the  body  almost  ceases  its  forward  glide.  Figs.  2 
and  3.   Page  37. 

Pull  right,  cross  over  left,  exhale — One ! 

Pull  left,  extend  right,  kick,  inhale — Two ! 

Hold,  inhale — Three  ! 

Figs.  3,  4  and  5.  Page  67.  To  simplify  the  transition  from  the  under-arm- 
side  stroke  to  the  single-over-arm-side  stroke,  start  from  the  side-push-off 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


67 


The  Single-Over-Arm-Side  Stroke.  Fig.  1.  Illustrates  the  first  part  of 
count  One!  Fig.  2.  Class  drill  illustrating  first  part  of  count  One! 
Fig.  3.  Finish  of  the  upper  arm  pull.  Fig.  4.  Recovery  of  the  upper 
arm.     Fig.  5,     Catch  position  of  the  upper  arm. 


68  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

then  swim  one  complete  side  stroke  and  follow  this  with  one  complete 
single-over-arm-side  stroke.  Repeat  this  until  it  is  executed  correctly  and 
with  ease.  Remember  that  the  single-over-arm-side  stroke  is  like  the  under- 
arm-side stroke  in  every  respect  except  that  the  upper  or  left  arm  recovers 
out  of  the  water. 

When  this  is  mastered,  swim  one  complete  under-arm-side  stroke  and 
alternate  with  two  complete  single-over-arm-side  strokes.  Then  the  novice 
is  ready  for  the  single-over-arm-side  stroke.  Also  refer  to  the  important 
note  given  in  the  under-arm-side  stroke,  water  drill,  for  the  coordinated 
stroke. 

If  one  is  able  to  swim  a  fair  single-over-arm-side  stroke,  it  will  not  be 
necessary  to  practice  this  stroke  by  the  above  described  method.  Simply 
swim  the  over-arm-side  stroke  entirely,  bearing  in  mind  the  important 
points  to  be  considered. 

During  this  water  drill  the  analysis  for  swimming  with  the  arms  and 
legs  alone  has  been  omitted,  because  it  is  much  easier  to  learn  the  single- 
over-arm-side  stroke  by  the  above  described  method.  Also  it  is  taken  for 
granted  that  the  swimmer  has  mastered  the  side  stroke  which  is  the  found- 
ation for  the  single-over-arm-side  stroke. 

Having  learned  the  above,  the  beginner  is  now  ready  to  swim  the  side 
stroke  with  greater  speed  by  omitting  count  Three !  or  the  glide  and  em- 
phasizing each  arm  pull. 

Refer  to  instructors'  note  for  the  under-arm-side  stroke,  page  164. 

DON'T 

Don't  reach  too  far  forward  with  the  recovering  left  arm,  as  this 
changes  the  body  position  from  the  side  to  the  chest. 

Don't  permit  the  elbow  to  drag  through  the  water  or  carry  the  hand 
high  on  the  recovery  of  the  left  arm,  because  this  offers  resistance  to 
the  water. 

Don't  pull  with  both  arms  at  the  same  time,  because  this  tends  to 
sink  the  body  and  causes  a  jerky  stroke. 

Don't  permit  the  arms  to  pull  in  large  circles  away  from  the  body, 
because  this  is  not  only  energy  wasted,  but  turns  the  body  on  the  chest 
or  the  back,  depending  upon  the  direction  of  the  pull. 

Don't  attempt  to  pull  with  the,  upper  or  left  arm  by  first  slapping 
the  water  surface,  because  this  is  wasted  energy  in  pulling  from  the  sur- 
face to  the  catch  position,  which  is  about  six  inches  under  the  water. 

Don't  attempt  the  catch  or  arm  pull  with  the  upper  arm  until  it  is 
extended  to  a  reach  position  and  about  six  inches  under  the  water  sur- 
face, because  this  increases  the  driving  power  of  the  stroke. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  69 

Don't  swim  with  the  upper  leg  flexed,  as  this  slightly  impedes  body 
progress. 

Don't  attempt  to  swim  the  side  stroke  in  a  half  forward  or  half 
backward  position,  because  the  body  must  be  entirely  on  the  side 
throughout  the  stroke. 

Don't  inhale  or  kick  until  the  upper  or  left  arm  starts  to  come  down 
across  the  body,  because  this  is  the  correct  timing  or  coordinatioii  of 
the  stroke. 

THE  DOUBLE  OVER-ARM  OR  TRUDGEON  STROKE 

This  stroke  is  of  value  in  life-saving  and  is  one  of  the  best  endurance 
strokes  used  in  long  distance  swimming. 

The  trudgeon  is  a  modification  and  outgrowth  of  the  single-over-arm 
side  stroke.  The  difference  is  that  both  arms  recover  out  of  the  water  al- 
ternately. This  causes  the  body  to  roll  from  the  side  to  the  chest,  theieby 
changing  the  head  position  in  breathing. 

The  progressive  steps  in  learning  or  teaching  this  stroke  are : 

(1)  Careful  analysis  of  the  land  drill,  arm  motions. 

(2)  Application  of  the  above  land  drill,  arm  motions,  in  the  water. 

(3)  Careful  analysis  of  the  land  drill,  leg  motions. 

(4)  Application  of  the  above  land  drills,  leg  motions,  in  the  water. 

(5)  Careful  analysis  of  the  land  drills,  combined  arm  and  leg  motions. 

(6)  Application  of  the  above  land  drills,  combined  arm  and  leg  motions, 
in  the  water. 

Refer  to  the  cardinal  points  concerning  swimming,  Page  43.  To  simplify 
the  transition  from  the  single-over-arm-side  stroke  to  the  trudgeon,  begin 
with  the  side-push-off,  then  swim  with  one'  complete  single-over-arm-side 
stroke  and  follow  it  with  one  complete  trudgeon  stroke.  This  alternation 
of  one  single-over-arm-side  stroke  with  the  trudgeon  stroke  makes  the 
change  gradual.  When  this  is  mastered  swim  one  complete  single-over-arm 
side  stroke  and  alternate  with  two  complete  trudgeon  strokes.  Then  the 
swimmer  is  ready  for  the  trudgeon  stroke. 

LAND   DRILL, 

Breathing. 

Exhale  through  the  nose ;  turn  the  head  face  down  during  the  last  half 
of  the  recovery  of  the  upper  arm,  or  the  latter  part  of  count  One!  Inhale 
through  the  mouth;  turn  the  head  to  the  left  during  the  last  half  of  the 
upper  arm  pull  or  during  the  latter  part  of  count  Two! 


70  SJJ7MMIXG  SIMPLIFIED 

FIRST  LAND  DRILL. 

1.  Arm  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

(1)  The  starting  position  for  this  land  drill  is  as  follows:  Stand,  body 
erect,  head  turned  slightly  to  the  left,  feet  together,  right  arm  raised  to 
vertical  position,  palm  forward,  the  extended  left  arm  at  the  side,  thumb 
touching  the"  body.  If  desired  the  land  drill  may  be  analyzed  according  to 
starting  position  (1). 

(2)  This  position  is  the  same  as  starting  position  (1),  then  bend  the 
body  forward  to  the  imaginary  water  line,  slightly  lowering  the  right 
shoulder  and  slightly  raising  the  left.  This  stroke  will  be  analyzed  accord- 
ing to  starting  position  (2),  as  it  approximates  the  water  drill.  Fig.  1. 
Page  71. 

This  stroke  is  analyzed  for  one  swimming  on  the  right  side,  therefore 
the  reverse  would  apply  for  one  swimming  on  the  left  side. 

Pull  right,  recover  over  left,  exhale — One  ! 

While  the  extended  right  arm  is  forcibly  pulling  dovvU  towards  the 
right  side  of  the  body,  finishing  relaxed  and  near  the  thigh,  cll^ow  slightly 
flexed,  palm  up;  the  relaxed  left  arm  is  recovering  forward  by  raising  the 
flexed  elbow,  keeping  the  wrist  extended,  hand  low,  finishing  in  a  reach  po- 
sition in  front  of  and  away  from  the  head.  Figs.  1,  2  and  3.     Page  71. 

Important  Note.— In  extending  the  recovering  left  arm  as  far  forward 
as  possible  to  a  reach  position,  the  left  shoulder  is  slightly  depressed,  there- 
by slightly  elevating  the  right  shoulder. 

Pull  left,  recover  over  right,  inhale — Two  ! 

While  the  extended  left  arm  is  forcibly  pulling  down  towards  the  left 
side  of  the  body,  finishing  relaxed  and  near  the  thigh,  elbows  slightly  flexed 
palm  up,  thereby  turning  the  body  on  the  right  side  with  head  turned 
to  the  left  ready  for  the  inhalation ;  the  relaxed  right  arm  is  recovering 
forward  by  raising  the  flexed  elbow,  keeping  the  wrist  extended,  hand  low, 
finishing  in  a  reach  position  in  front  of  and  away  from  the  head.  Figs.  3, 
4  and  1,  Page  71. 

Important  Note. — The  hands  should  approximately  travel  through  the 
same  plane  during  the  catch,  drive,  finish  and  recovery,  keeping  an  equal 
distance  apart  throughout. 

Motion  Picture  Land  Drill. 

Practice  the  above  land  drill,  taking  one  step  forward  during  each  arm 
pull,  or  count.  This  serves  as  a  motion  picture  land  drill,  illustrating  the 
propelling  power  of  the  stroke. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


The  Double-Over-Arm  or  Trudgeon  Stroke  Figs.  1,  2,  3  and  4. 
Illustrate  counts  One!  and  Two!  of  the  land  drill.  Fig.  5.  Class 
swimming  trudgeon  stroke. 


72  SJJ'IMMIXG  SIMPLIFIED 

2.  Leg  Motion. 

Legs  hold,  exhale — One  ! 

The  arms  remain  in  starting  position  throughout  this  drill. 

Body  turn,  scissor-kick,  inhale — Two  ! 

This  is  similar  to  the  scissor-kick  given  in  the  under-arm-side  stroke, 
first  land  drill,  except  that  on  count  Two !  the  body  and  feet  turn  slightly 
to  the  left,  preceding  the  scissor-kick.  Practice  using  the  upper  or  left  leg, 
then  the  lower  or  right  leg.  For  further  analysis  of  the  scissor-kick  refer 
to  the  under-arm-side  stroke,  first  and  second  land  drills,  leg  motion. 

3.  Combination  Arm  and  Leg  Motions — The  Coordinated  Stroke. 

The  coordination  of  the  trudgeon  consists  of  a  combination  of  the  arm 
and  leg  motions  according  to  counts  One !  and  Two  ! 
Pull  right,  recover  over  left,  exhale— One ! 
Pull  left,  recover  over  right,  turn,  kick,  inhale — Two! 

Figs.  1,  2,  3  and  4.  Page  71.  Tmpdrtaxt  Note.— The  combination  of  the 
arm  and  leg  motions  is  of  value  in  analyzing  the  correct  timing  of  the 
stroke,  though  it  only  approximates  the  body's  position  while  in  the  water. 

This  land  drill  may  be  practiced  while  lying  on  a  spring  board,  or  other 
support,  legs  extended  over  the  edge. 

While  the  right  arm  is  forcibly  pulling,  the  relaxed  left  arm  is  recover- 
ing and  vice  versa.  Open  the  legs  easily  during  the  recovery  and  forcibly 
bring  them  together  during  the  drive. 

WATER   DRILL 

Breathing. 

Exhale  through  the  nose ;  submerge  the  face.  The  exhalation  occurs 
during  the  last  half  of  the  recovery  of  the  upper  arm,  or  during  the  latter 
part  of  count  One!  Inhale  through  the  mouth  by  turning  the  head  to  the 
left,  mouth  raised  sufficiently  to  clear  water  surface. 

The  inhalation  occurs  during  the  last  half  of  the  upper  arm  pull,  or 
during  the  latter  part  of  count  Two  !  During  the  remainder  of  the  stroke 
the  face  is  turned  to  the  side  or  submerged  preparatory  to  the  inhalation 
or  exhalation. 

FIRST  WATER  DRILL. 

1.  Arm  Motion 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand  in  the  water;  submerge  the  shoulders.  During  this  drill  the  ex- 
tended right  arm  remains  at  the  side  of  the  body.  The  relaxed  left  arm  is 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


n 


The  Double  Over  Arm  or  Trudgeon   Stroke.     Fig.   1.      Upper  arm 

in   finish   position.     Fig.   2.  Upper  arm   in   recovery.     Fig.   3.     Upper 

arm  in  catch  position.     Fig.  4.  Upper  arm  pulling.     Fig.  5.  Beginning  of 
count  One! 


74  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

near  the  thigh  and  in  a  position  for  the  recovery,  elbow  shghtly  flexed, 
back  of  hand  resting  on  water  surface.  The  head  and  body  are  turned  to 
the  left.  Fig.  1.  Page  13. 

The  first  water  drill  is  a  detailed  analysis  of  the  upper  arm  during  the 
complete  stroke. 

Upper  arm — Bend  ! 

The  recovery  of  the  relaxed  upper  or  left  arm  is  simplified  by  first  rais- 
ing the  flexed  elbow  high  enough  to  bring  the  extended  wrist  and  lowered 
hand  forward  just  above  the  water  surface.     Fig.  2,  Page  72). 

Upper  arm  in  position  for  the  catch — IMace ! 

The  catch  is  executed  by  extending  the  arm  as  far  forward  as  possible 
to  a  reach  position,  turning  the  body  on  the  chest,  and  slightly  depressing 
the  left  shoulder,  finishing  with  the  hand  about  six  inches  under  water  sur- 
face. Fig.  3.  Page  72).  With  the  arm  in  this  position  one  is  able  to  get  the 
best  possible  leverage  on  the  water.  Be  careful  not  to  start  the  stroke  with 
the  hand  in  a  diagonal  forward  position,  or  crossed  in  front  of  the  imag- 
inary center  line  of  the  body.  Insert  the  hands  straight  ahead  arjd  shoulder 
width  apart.  The  catch,  pull,  finish  and  recovery  of  the  stroke  is  approxi- 
mately in  the  same  plane  throughout. 

Upper  arm — Pull ! 

The  pull  (jr  drive  is  executed  forcibly  and  the  direction  is  straight  dowri 
through  the  water  and  close  to  the  bod3^  Be  careful  not  to  pull  in  a  zig- 
zag fashion.     Fig.  4.  Page  72. 

Upper  arm  in  position  for  the  finish — Place  ! 

The  finish  of  the  stroke  is  executed  with  the  arm  partially  flexed,  back 
of  hand  resting  on  water  surface.     Fig.  1.  Page  73. 

Repeat  this  drill  until  it  is  mastered  and  the  recovery  of  the  upper  arm 
becomes  easy  and  natural. 

SECOND   WATER  DRILL. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand  in  the  shallow  end  of  the  pool ;  submerge  the  shoulders.  Then  as- 
sume the  correct  starting  position  for  the  arm  motion ;  that  is,  right  arm' 
extended,  hand  about  six  inches  under  the  water,  palm  down,  shoulder 
slightly  depressed ;  the  left  arm  near  the  thigh  and  in  position  for  the  re- 
covery, elbows  slightly  flexed,  back  of  hand  resting  on  water  surface;  top 
of  head  in  the  water,  chin  up;  look  back  slightly  over  the  left  shoulder. 

Pull  right,  recover  over  left,  exhale — One  ! 

Practice  the  complete  arm  motion,  applying  the  description  given  in  the 
preceding  drill.  Then  practice  this  arm  motion  with  breathing.  During 
the  latter  part  of  count  One!  turn  the  body  on  the  chest;  submerge  the 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  75 

face;  exhale  through  the  nose.  During  the  latter  part  of  count  Two!  turn 
the  body  on  the  right  side,  raise  the  mouth  sufficiently  to  clear  water  sur- 
face. First  exhale  the  final  bit  of  air,  then  inhale. 


FIRST   AND   SECOND  WATER   DRILLS. 

2.  Leg  Motion. 

Legs  hold,  exhale — One  ! 

Counts  One!  and  Two!  of  this  drill  are  the  same  as  described  in  the 
first  and  second  water  drills,  leg  motions,  of  the  under-arm-side  stroke. 
Turn  body,  scissor-kick,  inhale — Two ! 


3.  Combination  Arm  and  Leg  Motions — The  Coordinated  Stroke. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 
Start  from  a  side-push-off  position.  Then  push  away,  and  remain  in  the 
correct  side  position  until  the  momentum  of  the  glide  has  nearly  ceased. 
Figs.  2  and  3.  Page  37. 

Pull  right,  recover  over  left,  exhale — One ! 

Pull  left,  recover  over  right,  turn,  kick,  inhale — Two ! 

Fig.  5.  Page  73.  Important  Note.  To  simplify  the  transition  to  the  trud- 
geon,  start  from  the  side-push-off;  then  swim  one  complete  single-over- 
arm-side stroke ;  follow  this  with  one  complete  trudgeon  stroke.  In  other 
words  the  second  time  the  left  arm  recovers,  extend  it  as  far  forward  as 
possible,  inserting  the  hand  about  six  inches  under  the  water,  thereby 
slightly  depressing  the  left  shoulder.  At  the  same  time  turn  the  body  on  the 
chest ;  submerge  the  face ;  exhale  through  the  nose.  Then  as  the  left  arm 
pulls  down  through  the  water,  turn  on  the  right  side,  kick,  inhale.  During 
the  inhalation  turn  the  head  to  the  left  side,  mouth  raised  sufficiently  to 
clear  water  surface.  During  the  exhalation  the  face  is  submerged.  Refer 
to  the  analysis  of  breathing,  chapter  II. 

If  one  is  already  able  to  swim  a  fair  trudgeon  stroke  it  will  not  be 
necessary  to  practice  the  preliminary  steps  described  above.  Perfect  the 
trudgeon  bearing  in  mind  the  various  points  to  be  considered. 

During  the  water  drill  the  analysis  of  swimming  with  the  arms  and  legs 
alone  has  been  omitted,  because  it  is  much  easier  to  learn  the  trudgeon  by 
the  method  described  above.  Also,  it  is  taken  for  granted  that  the  swimmer 
has  mastered,  the  side  and  single-over-arm-side  strokes  which  is  the  found- 
ation for  the  trudgeon  according  to  the  natural  progression  of  strokes. 

Refer  to  instructors'  note  for  the  trudgeon  stroke,  page  164. 


1(,  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

DON'T 

Don't  raise  the  head  high  above  the  water  when  inhaling,  because 
this  sinks  the  feet  and  disturbs  the  body  balance. 

Don't  swim  with  the  head  held  high  above  the  water,  as  this  causes 
the  body  to  drag. 

Don't  swim  with  the  head  submerged,  because  this  impedes  prog- 
ress. 

Don't  permit  the  arms  to  recover  with  the  elbows  dragging  in  the 
water,  hand  high,  because  this  offers  resistance  and  retards  progress. 

Don't  finish  the  arm  recovery  by  crossing  the  hands  in  front  of  the 
head,  because  this  decreases  the  length  of  arm  pull. 

Don't  raise  the  hands  high  out  of  the  water  at  the  finish  of  the  arm 
pull,  because  this  is  wasted  energy. 

Don't  finish  this  arm  recovery  with  the  arms  too  far  apart,  as  this 
results  in  poor  leverage  against  the  water  for  the  catch. 

Don't  pull  in  a  zig-zag  fashion,  because  this  decreases  the  pulling 
power. 

Don't  swim  with  the  fingers  apart,  because  this  diminishes  the  pull- 
ing power. 

Don't  swim  with  the  knees  flexed,  because  this  slightly  impedes 
progress. 

Don't  separate  the  knees  more  than  ten  inches,  because  this  retards 
progress. 

Don't  attempt  to  kick  until  the  second  count,  because  force  is  lost 
in  the  leg  drive. 

Don't  swim  with  the  body  rigid,  because  this  is  fatiguing  and  diffi- 
cult. 

Don't  forget  to  relax  the  body  during  the  recovery  of  the  stroke. 

THE  TRUDGEON-CRAWL 

This  stroke  is  considered  by  many  to  be  the  best  of  all  long  distance 
strokes. 

The  trudgeon-crawl  is  an  outgrowth  of  the  trudgeon,  and  serves  as  a 
transition  stroke  to  the  crawl.  This  stroke  is  a  slight  variation  from  the 
trudgeon,  the  only  difference  is  that  the  scissor-kick  is  intercepted  by  the 
up  and  down  leg  thrash  of  the  crawl-kick  and  there  is  a  slightly  decreased 
body  roll.  In  consequence  the  trudgeon-crawl  has  greater  speed  than  the 
trudgeon,  because  the  crawl-kick  helps  to  propel  the  body  forward  instead 
of  allowing  the  legs  to  drag  as  in  the  trudgeon. 

The  progressive  steps  in  learning  or  teaching  this  stroke  are  the  same 
as  those  given  in  the  trudgeon. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  77 

I.AND  DRILI. 

Breathing. 

Exhale  through  the  nose;  turn  the  head  face  down  during  the  last  half 
of  the  recovery  of  the  upper  arm,  or  the  latter  part  of  count  One!  Inhale 
through  the  mouth ;  turn  the  head  to  the  left  during  the  last  half  of  the 
upper  arm  pull  or  the  latter  part  of  count  Two ! 

FIRST  LAND  DRILL,. 

1.  Arm  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Starting  position  for  this  drill  is  the  same  as  given  for  the  trudgeon 
stroke. 

Pull  right,  recover  over  left,  exhale — One ! 

Pull  left,  recover  over  right,  inhale — Two  ! 

The  description  of  this  drill  is  the  same  as  given  in  the  land  drill  of  the 
trudgeon  stroke. 

Motion  Picture  Land  Drill. 

Practice  the  above  land  drill,  taking  one  step  forward  during  each  arm 
pull,  or  count.  This  serves  as  a  motion  picture  land  drill,  illustrating  the 
propelling  power  of  the  stroke. 

2.  Leg  Motion. 

Crawl-kick,  exhale — One  ! 

Raise  the  extended  left  leg  to  the  rear  about  six  inches,  toes  pointed; 
then  forcibly  replace  it.  Repeat,  substituting  the  right  leg. 
Body  turn,  scissor-kick,  inhale — Two  ! 
Refer  to  the  trudgeon  land  drill,  leg  motion. 

3.  Combination  of  Arm  and  Leg  Motions — The  Coordinated  Stroke. 

The  coordination  of  the  trudgeon-crawl,  consists  in  the  combination  of 
the  arm  and  leg  motions  according  to  counts  One !  and  Two ! 
Pull  right,  recover  over  left,  crawl-kick,  exhale — One! 
Pull  left,  recover  over  right,  body  turn,  scissor-kick,  inhale — Two  ! 

Important  Note. — The  combination  of  the  arm  and  leg  motions  is  of 
value  in  analyzing  the  correct  timing  of  the  stroke,  though  it  only  approx- 
imates the  body's  position  while  in  the  water. 

The  correct  timing  of  the  trudgeon-crawl  can  be  learned  if  one  observes 
the  following  rule :  During  the  right  arm  pull  or  count  One !  execute  the 


78  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

crawl-kick  beginning  with  the  left  leg,  finishing  the  second  beat  with  the 
right  leg.  During  the  left  arm  pull  or  count  Two!  turn  slightly  to  the  left; 
execute  a  small  scissor-kick.  , 

While  the  right  arm  is  forcibly  pulling,  the  relaxed  left  arm  is  recover- 
ing and  vice  versa.  Open  the  legs  easily  during  the  recovery,  and  bring 
them  together  forcibly  during  the  drive. 

WATER   DRILL 

Breathing. 

Exhale  through  the  nose ;  submerge  the  face.  The  exhalation  occurs 
during  the  last  half  of  the  recovery  of  the  upper  arm  or  during  the  latter 
part  of  count  One!  Inhale  through  the  mouth  by  turning  the  head  to  the 
left,  mouth  raised  sufficiently  to  clear  water  surface.  The  inhalation  occurs 
during  the  last  half  of  the  upper  arm  pull,  or  during  the  latter  part  of 
count  Two!  During  the  remainder  of  the  stroke  the  face  is  turned  to  the 
side  or  submerged  preparatory  to  the  inhalation  or  exhalation, 

FIRST  AND  SECOND  WATER  DRILLS. 

1.  Arm  Motion. 

Pull  right,  recover  over  left,  exhale — One! 
Pull  left,  recover  over  right,  inhale — Two ! 

The  starting  position  and  description  of  these  drills  is  the  same  as  given 
in  the  first  and  second  water  drills  of  the  trudgeon. 

2.  Leg  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Face  the  side  of  the  tank;  grasp  the  railing  with  the  left  hand;  place 
the  palm  of  the  right  hand  against  the  side  of  the  tank  about  eight  inches 
under  the  water  surface,  with  the  fingers  pointing  down,  thumb  out.  Then 
assume  a  correct  face-submerged-floating  position ;  that  is,  legs  extended 
knees  almost  touching,  toes  pointed,  ankles  relaxed.  Fig.  1,  Page  25. 

Crawl-kick,  exhale — One  ! 

Practice  the  crawl-kick  which  consists  of  a  series  of  quick  alternate  up 
and  down  leg  thrashes  of  even  length.  The  leg  drive  extends  from  the 
hips  to  the  pointed  toes,  the  thrash  being  about  eight  inches  and  not  more 
than  fourteen.  At  first,  work  the  legs  slowly  until  a  correct  and  easy  rhythm 
is  established.  Then  practice  the  correct  timing  of  the  stroke  by  using  two 
or  four  leg  beats  during  count  One !  or  the  exhalation.  Each  downward 
movement  of  the  leg  constitutes  a  beat.  The  best  timing  for  the  trudgeon- 
crawl  is  using  two  leg  thrashes  or  beats  during  count  One !  or  the  exhal- 
ation. During  this  count,  begin  the  leg  thrash  with  the  left  leg  and  finish 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  79 

it  with  the  right.  Be  careful  not  to  raise  the  feet  above  the  water  surface, 
or  noticeably  bend  the  knees  as  energy  is  lost.     Fig.  1.  Page  25. 

The  crawl-kick  may  be  first  practiced  with  the  head  raised  and  then  with 
breathing. 

Turn  body,  scissor-kick,  inhale — Two  ! 

For  the  complete  analysis  of  the  scissor-kick  refer  to  the  first  and  sec- 
ond water  drills,  leg  motions,  of  the  under-arm-side  stroke.  Fig.  4. 
Page  63. 

Important  Note. — When  each  count  of  the  above  land  drill  is  learned, 
practice  the  complete  leg  motion,  first  using  two  crawl-kicks ;  then  turn 
the  body  on  the  right  side  and  follow  it  with  the  scissor-kick,  being  careful 
not  to  separate  the  knees  more  than  ten  inches,  and  keeping  the  legs  as 
straight  as  possible. 


3.  Combination  of  Arm  and  Leg  Motions — The  Coordinated  Stroke. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Start  from  the  side-push-off  position.  Push  away,  body  remaining  in 
correct  side  position  until  the  momentum  of  the  glide  has  nearly  ceased. 
Figs.  2  and  3.  Page  37. 

Pull  right,  recover  over  left,  crawl-kick,  exhale — One! 

Pull  left,  recover  over  right,  body  turn,  scissor-kick,  inhale — Two ! 

Practice  this  stroke  as  already  described  in  the  trudgeon,  second  water 
drill,  but  on  count  One !  add  two  or  four  leg  beats.    Fig.  5.    Page  73.    Fig. 

4.  Page  87. 

Refer  to  the  instructors'  note  for  the  trudgeon-crawl,  page  165. 


DON'T 

Don't  bend  the  knees  noticeably  or  raise  the  feet  high  out  of  the 
water  in  the  crawl-kick,  because  this  limits  the  leg  drive  to  the  lower 
knee,  and  energy  is  lost. 

Don't  attempt  the  crawl-kick  with  the  ankles  flexed,  because  this  im- 
pedes progress. 

Don't  attempt  the  crawl-kick  with  the  legs  and  ankles  held  rigid,  be- 
cause this  is  fatiguing. 

Don't  atempt  the  crawl-kick  with  the  legs  held  far  apart,  as  this  of- 
fers greater  resistance. 

Also  refer  to  the  Don't  section  of  the  trudgeon. 


80  SJVIMMIXG  SIMPLIFIED 

THE  PRELIMINARY  CRAWL 

The  preliminary  crawl  serves  as  a  foundation  stroke,  and  simplifies 
the  mastery  of  the  crawl;  that  is,  it  is  necessary  to  proceed  with  the 
preliminary  crawl,  if  the  novice  is  desirous  of  first  learning  the  crawl  in 
the  progression  of  strokes. 

The  progressive  steps  in  learning  or  teaching  this  stroke  are: 

(1)  Learn  all  of  Chapter  II,  the  "Beginners  First  Lessons,"  paying 
particular  attention  to  breathing  and  face-submerge-push-off. 

(2)  Careful  analysis  of  the  land  drill,  arm  motion. 

(3)  Application  of  the  above  land  drill,  arm  motion,  in  the  water. 

(4)  Careful  analysis  of  the  land  drill,  leg  motion. 

(5)  Application  of  the  above  land  drill,  leg  motion,  in  the  water. 

(6)  The  coordinated  stroke  in  the  water. 


LAND  DRILL, 
FIRST   LAND  DRILL. 

L  Arm  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take! 

Stand,  body  erect,  feet  together,  right  arm  raised  to  vertical  position, 
palm  forward,  the  extended  left  arm  at  the  side,  thumb  touching  body. 
Then  bend  the  body  forward  to  the  imaginary  water  line. 

Pull  down  and  under  right,  circle  over  and  forward  left — One! 

Start  an  alternating  paddle  motion  with  the  arms,  keeping  them  the 
same  distance  apart  throughout.  While  the  extended  right  arm  is  forcibly 
pulling  down  towards  the  right  side  of  the  body;  the  left  arm  is  circling 
forward  by  raising  the  bent  elbow,  hand  low. 

Pull  down  and  under  left,  circle  over  and  forward  right — Two! 

Execute  count  One!  substituting  the  pull  with  the  left  arm  and  the 
recovery  with  the  right  arm. 

Important  Note. — Emphasize  the  body  roll  to  the  side  of  the  pulling 
arm. 

Motion  Picture  Land  Drill. 

Practice  the  above  land  drill  taking  one  step  forward  during  each 
arm  pull,  or  count.  This  serves  as  a  motion  picture  land  drUl,  illustra- 
ting the  propelling  power  of  the  stroke. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  81 

2.  Leg  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take! 

Lie  face  down,  relaxed  legs  extended  over  edge  of  pool,  knees 
slightly  apart,  toes  pointed. 

Kick  left  leg — One! 

Raise  the  extended  or  straightened  left  leg  to  the  rear  about  six 
inches,  toes  pointed;  then  replace  it. 

Kick  right  leg — Two! 

Raise  extended  right  leg  to  the  rear  about  six  inches,  toes  pointed; 
then  replace  it. 

Important  Note. — Each  downward  movement  of  the  leg  constitutes  a 
beat.  While  the  right  arm  is  forcibly  pulling,  the  relaxed  left  arm  is 
recovering  and  vice  versa. 

WATER  DRILL, 
FIRST  WATER  DRILL. 

\.    Arm  Motions 

Stand  in  the  shallow  end  of  the  pool;  submerge  the  shoulders.  Dur- 
ing this  drill  the  extended  right  arm  remains  at  the  side  of  the  body. 
The  relaxed  left  arm  is  extended  to  the  rear  of  the  body,  back  of  hand 
resting  on  the  water  surface,  ready  for  the  circling  forward  or  the  re- 
covery. 

The  first  water  drill  is  a  detailed  analysis  of  the  arm  motion. 

Upper  arm — Bend! 

The  upper  or  left  arm  is  brought  forward  in  a  circling  motion, 
just  above  the  water  surface. 

Upper  arm  in  position  for  the  start — Place! 

Straighten  the  arms  and  place  the  hand  slightly  under  the  water  sur- 
face, fingers  together. 

Upper  arm — Pull! 

Forcibly  pull  straight  down  through  the  water  and  close  to  the  body. 

Upper  arm  in  position  for  the  finish — Place! 

Finish  the  stroke  with  the  arm  slightly  bent  or  flexed,  back  of  hand 
resting  on  water  surface. 

Repeat  this  drill  until  it  is  mastered  and  the  recovery  or  circling 
forward  of  the  upper  arm  above  the  water  and  the  forcible  pull  is  exe- 
cuted correctly. 

SECOND   WATER   DRILL. 

Starting  position — Take! 

Stand  in  the  shallow  end  of  the  pool;' submerge  the  shoulders  and  as- 
sume the  correct  starting  position  for  the  arms;  that  is,  right  arm  ex- 


82  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

tended,  hand  about  six  inches  under  the  water,  pahti  down,  the  left  arm 
to  the  rear  of  the  body  slightly  bent  or  flexed,'  back  of  hand  resting  on 
water  surface. 

Pull  down  and  under  right,  circle  over  and  forward  left — One! 

Pull  down  and  under  left,  circle  over  and  forward  right — Two! 

Practice  the  complete  arm  motion  with  the  head  raised,  applying  the 
description-  given  in  the  preceeding  drill.  Then  repeat  the  arm  motion 
with  the  head  submerged. 

THIRD    WATER  DRILL. 

Starting  position — Take! 

Start  from  the  face-submerged-push-off  position,  but  grasp  the  rail- 
ing with  the  left  hand,  right  arm  extended  and  resting  on  water  surface. 
Inhale;  submerge  the  face;  push  away. 

Pull  down  and  under  right,  circle  o\'er  and  forward  left — One! 

Pull  down  and  under  left,  circle  over  and  forward  right — Two! 

Begin  swimming  using  an  alternating  paddle  motion,  keeping  the 
arms  the  same  distance  apart,  forcibly  pull  deep  down  through  the  wat- 
er, returning  with  a  circling  forward  motion  above  the  water.  Remem- 
ber to  keep  the  elbow  slightly  raised,  hand  low. 

Having  executed  a  few  strokes  with  the  face  submerged,  practice 
this  drill  until  it  can  be  done  correctly  and  with  ease. 

FIRST  WATER  DRILL. 

2.  Leg  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Face  the  side  of  the  tank;  grasp  the  railing;  asj^ume  the  face-sub- 
merged-floating position;  that  is,  legs  extended,  knees  almost  touching, 
toes  pointed,  ankles  relaxed. 

Kick  left  leg — One! 

Kick  right  leg — Two! 

Practice  the  crawl-kick,  which  consists  of  a  series  of  alternate  up 
and  down  leg  thrashes  of  even  length,  the  leg  drive  extends  from  the 
hips  to  the  pointed  toes,  the  thrash  being  about  ten  inches.  The  crawl- 
kick  may  be  first  practiced  with  the  head  raised  and  then  submerged. 

At  first  work  the  legs  slowly,  beginning  with  the  left  leg,  then  the 
right  leg,  counting  One! — Two!  Be  careful  not  to  raise  the  feet  above 
the  water  surface  or  noticeably  bend  the  knees,  as  energy  is  lost  and 
this  impedes  progress. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  83 

SECOND  WATER  DRILL. 

Starting  position — Take! 

Assume  the  correct  face-submerged-push-off  position,  inhale,  push 
away. 

Kick  left  leg — One! 

Kick  right  leg — Two. 

Practice  this  kick  several  times,  propelling  the  body  forward  a  short 
distance,  then  regain  standing  position. 

3.  Combination  of  Arm  and  Leg  Motions — The  Coordinated  Stroke. 

Starting  position — Take! 

Start  from  the  face-submerged-push-off  position,  but  grasp  the  rail- 
ing with  the  left  hand,  right  arm  extended  and  resting  on  water  surface. 
Inhale,  push  away. 

Pull  down  and  under  right,  circle  over  and  forward  left,  kick,  ex- 
hale— One! 

Pull  down  and  under  left,  circle  over  and  forward  right,  kick,  in- 
hale— Two! 

The  decided  body  roll  from  side  to  side  necessitates  a  natural  two 
beat  crawl-kick.  To  make  sure  of  the  correct  timing  or  coordination, 
remember  that  while  the  right  arm  pulls  forcibly  down  through  the 
water,  the  left  leg  kicks;  and  as  the  left  arm  pulls  forcibly  down 
through  the  water  the  right  leg  kicks. 

(1)  Practice  the  combination  of  arm  and  leg  motions  with  the  head 
submerged. 

(2)  Practice  the  coordinated  stroke  with  the  head  raised;  breath 
naturally. 

(3)  Practice  the  coordinated  stroke  with  the  head  submerged  and 
then  raised;  that  is,  exhale  through  the  mouth  by  submerging  the 
face  as  the  upper  or  left  arm  circles  forward,  and  then  inhale 
through  the  mouth  by  turning  the  face  to  the  left,  mouth  raised  suf- 
ficiently to  clear  water  surface  as  the  upper  arm  pulls  down  through 
the  water. 

The  Hawaiians  have  successfully  used  the  surf-board  as  a  means  of 
enabling  them  to  learn  the  crawl.  Lie  on  the  board.  First,  practice  the 
arm  motions,  second,  the  leg  motions,  and  third,  the  combination  of 
arm  and  leg  motions.  The  object  of  using  the  board  is  that  it  gives  ad- 
ded confidence,  and  develops  an  independent  arm  and  leg  action.  An 
easy  rhythm  and  correct  coordination  is  unconsciously  established. 
Having  learned  the  preliminary  crawl,  the  novice  is  ready  for  the  crawl. 

Refer  to  the  instructors'  note   for  the  preliminary  crawl,  page  165. 


84  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

DON'T 

Don't  circle  the  arm  forward  with  the  elbow  dragging  through  the 
water,  as  this  retards  progress. 

Don't  hold  the  arm  rigid  when  it  is  brought  forward,  as  this  is 
fatiguing. 

Don't  ci.rclc  over  with  the  hand  carried  high  above  the  water,  as  this 
tends  to  s'nk  the  body  and  results  in  an  awkward  stroke. 

Don't  attempt  the  arm  pull  with  the  fingers  apart,  as  this  lessens 
the  propelling  power. 

Don't  bring  the  feet  out  of  the  water,  as  this  is  a  waste  of  energy. 

Don't  flex  the  ankles  and  noticeably  bend  the  knees,  as  this  retards 
progress  and  limits  the  leg  drive. 

Don't  hold  the  legs  stiff,  as  this  is  fatiguing. 


THE  CRAWL 

Having  learned  the  trudgeon-crawl  or  preliminary  crawl,  we  shall  next 
advance  to  the  speediest  of  all  strokes,  the  famous  crawl,  which  is  used  in 
sprint  and  in  long  distance  swimming.  The  difference  between  the  crawl 
and  the  trudgeon  crawl  is  in  the  substitution  of  the  crawl-kick  throughout, 
thereby  eliminating  the  body  roll  from  the  side  to  the  chest  and  diminishing 
the  shoulder  depression.  There  is  also  a  difference  in  the  head  position 
in  breathing. 

The  progressive  steps  in  learning  or  teaching  this  stroke  are  : 

(1)  Careful  analysis  of  the  land  drills,  arm  motion. 

(2)  Application  of  the  above  land  drills,  arm  motions  in  the  water. 

(3)  Careful  analysis  of  the  land  drills,  leg  motions. 

(4)  Application  of  land  drills,  leg  motions,  in  the  water. 

(5)  Careful  analysis  of  the  land  drills,  combined  arm  and  leg  motions. 

(6)  Application  of  the  above  land  drills,  combined  arm  and  leg  motions, 
in  the  water. 

Refer  to  the  cardinal  points  concerning  swimming,  page  43. 


LAND  DRILL 

Breathing. 

Exhale  through  the  nose;  turn  the  head  face  down  during  the  last  half 
of  the  recovery  of  the  upper  arm,  or  the  latter  part  of  count  One  I  Inhale 
through  the  mouth;  turn  the  head  slightly  to  the  left  during  the  last  half 
of  the  upper  arm  pull  or  latter  part  of  count  Two  ! 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


The  Crawl.  Fig.  1. 
finish-  position.  Fig-_2. 
in  catch  position.     Fig. 


Starting    position,    also    showing    upper    arm    in 
Upper  arm  in  recovery.     Fig.  3.     Upper  arm 
4.     Upper  arm  pulling. 


86  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

FIRST   LAND  DRILL. 

1.  Arm  Motion, 

Starting  position — -Take  ! 

The  starting  position  for  the  first  land  drill  is  as  follows  :  Stand,  body- 
erect,  feet  together,  right  arm  raised  to  vertical  position,  palm  forward, 
the  extended  left  arm  at  the  side,  thumb  touching  body.  Then  bend  the 
body  forwa"rd  to  the  imaginary  water  line,  turning  the  head  slightly  to 
the  left. 

Pull  right,  recover  over  left,  exhale — One ! 

While  the  extended  right  arm  is  forcibly  pulling  down  towards  the 
right  side  of  the  body,  finishing  relaxed  and  near  the  thigh,  elbow  slightly- 
flexed,  palm  up;  the  relaxed  left  arm  is  recovering  forward  by  raising  the 
flexed  elbow,  keeping  the  wrist  extended,  hand  low,  finishing  in  a  reach 
position  in  front  of  and  away  from  the  head.  At  the  same  time  turn  the 
head  down  for  the  exhalation. 

Pull  left,  recover  over  right,  inhale — Two ! 

Execute  count  One !  substituting  pull  with  the  left  arm,  the  recovery 
with  the  right ;  at  the  same  time,  turn  the  head  slightly  to  the  left  for  the 
inhalation.     Figs.  1  and  2.     Page  87. 

Important  Note. — The  hands  should  travel  approximately  through  the 
same  plane  during  the  catch,  pull,  finish,  and  recovery  of  the  stroke. 
The  arms  should  be  an  equal  distance  apart.  Remember  that  the  body 
does  not  turn  from  the  side  to  the  chest  as  in  the  trudgeon,  but  rolls 
slightly  from  side  to  side,  which  facilitates  a  correct  arm  recovery  and 
aids  in  breathing. 

SECOND  LAND   DRILL. 

Practice  the  above  land  drill,  taking  one  step  forward  during  each  arm 
pull,  or  count.  This  serves  as  a  motion  picture  land  drill,  illustrating  the 
propelling  power  of  the  stroke. 

2.  Leg  Motion. 

Crawl-kick,  exhale — One  ! 

Raise  the  extended  left  leg  to  the  rear  about  six  inches,  toes  pointed ; 
then  forcibly  replace  it. 

Crawl-kick,  inhale — Two  ! 

Raise  the  extended  right  leg  to  the  rear  about  six  inches,  toes  pointed ; 
then  forcibly  replace  it.     Fig.  1.  Page  87. 

Important  Note. — Having  learned  the  above  drill,  practice  it  using 
two,  three,  or  four  beats  to  each  count.     Each  downward  movement  of 


siriMMiyc  siMPLiPinD 


87 


The  Crawl  Fig.  1.  Upper  or  left  arm  in  catch  position.  Fig.  2.  Upper 
arm  pnlhnr  Fig.'^.  Upper  arm  recovering.  F.g.  4.  Front  view  of  the 
upper  arm  recovering.     Fig.  5.  Upper  arm  pullmg. 


88  SIVIMMLYG  SIMPLIFIED 

the  legs  constitutes  a  beat.     This  land  drill  only  approximates  the  crawl- 
kick. 

3.  Combination  of  Arm  and  Leg  Motions — The  Coordinated  Stroke. 

The  coordination  of  the  crawl  consists  of  the  combination  of  the  arm 
and  leg  motion  according  to  counts  One !  and  Two  !  Figs.  1  and  2.  Page 
87. 

Pull  right,  recover  over  left,  kick,  exhale — One ! 


Pull  left,  recover  over  right,  kick,  inhale — T 


wo 


By  applying  the  following  rule  one  will  be  able  to  determine  the  correct 
timing  or  coordination  of  the  arm  and  leg  motions  for  the  two,  four,  six, 
or  eight  beat  crawl.  Begin  the  stroke  by  pulling  zcith  the  right  arm.  at  the 
sa)ne  time  exeeutiug  the  first  leg  beat  zcitli  the  left  leg ;  finish  the  complete 
stroke  by  pulling  with  the  left  arm,  at  the  same  time  executing  the  last  beat 
icith  the  right  leg.  The  application  of  this  rule  for  the  two,  four,  six  or 
eight  beat  crawl  is  as  follows  : 
Two  Beat  Crawd  : 

Right  arm  pull ;  left  leg  kick. 
Left  arm  pull ;  right  leg  kick. 
Four  Beat  Crawl : 

Right  arm  pull ;  left,  right  leg  kick. 
Left  arm  pull;  left,  right  leg  kick. 
Six  Beat  Crawl : 

Right  arm  pull ;  left,  right,  left  leg  kick. 
Left  arm  pull ;  right,  left,  right  leg  kick. 
Eight  Beat  Crawl : 

Right  arm  pull:  left,  right,  left,  right  leg  kick. 
Left  arm  pull;  left,  right,  left,  right  leg  kick. 

SECOND  LAND   DRILL,, 

1.  Arm  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Starting  position  for  the  second  land  drill  is  as  follows  :  Lie  face  down, 
the  extended  right  arm  in  vertical  position  palm  down,  the  left  arm  in 
position  for  the  recovery,  elbows  slightly  flexed,  palm  up,  legs  extended 
and  knees  slightly  separated,  toes  pointed,  and  ankles  slightly  relaxed. 
Use  the  end  of  the  spring  board  or  bench,  or  some  support  which  will 
give  freedom  for  arm  and  leg  motion.     Fig.  L  Page  85. 

Pull  right,  recover  over  left,  exhale — One! 

Counts  One!  and  Two!  of  the  arm  motion  are  the  same  as  described 
in  the  first  land  drill.     Figs.  1.  2,  3  and  4.  Page  85. 

Pull  left,  recover  over  right,  inhale — Two  ! 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  89 

2.  Leg  Motion. 

Crawl-kick,  exhale — One  ! 

Practice  the  alternate  up  and  down  leg  thrashes  with  a  drive  of  about 
eight  inches  and  not  more  than  fourteen.  Keep  the  legs  and  ankles  ex- 
tended, though  slightly  relaxed.  Use  two,  three,  or  four  leg  thrashes  or 
beats  during  each  count.     Figs.  1,  2,  3  and  4.  Page  85. 

Crawl-kick,  inhale — Two  ! 

Repeat  count  One ! 

3.  Combination  of  Arm  and  Leg  Motions — The  Coordinated  Stroke. 

The  coordination  of  the  crawl  stroke  taken  lying  down  is  the  same  as 
described  in  the  first  land  drill.  The  best  results  have  been  obtained  by 
practicing  the  coordinated  stroke,  using  six  beats  to  the  complete  arm 
motion. 

Pull  right,  recover  over  left,  kick,  exhale — One! 

Pull  left,  recover  over  right,  kick,  inhale — Two  ! 

Usually  there  is  not  enough  apparatus  available  to  enable  the  class  to 
execute  this  drill.  But  it  may  be  practiced  at  home  and  a  clearer  idea  of 
the  correct  timing  of  the  stroke  obtained.     Figs.  1,  2,  3  and  4,  Page  85. 

Important  Note. — While  the  right  arm  is  forcibly  pulling,  the  relaxed 
left  arm  is  recovering,  and  vice  versa.  Open  the  legs  easily  during  the 
recovery  and  forcibly  luring  them  together  during  the  drive. 


WATER   DRILL 

Breathing. 

Exhale  through  the  nose  ;  submerge  the  face.  The  exhalation  occurs 
during  the  last  half  of  the  recovery  of  the  upper  arm,  or  during  the  latter 
part  of  count  One !  Inhale  through  the  mouth  by  turning  the  head 
slightly  to  the  left,  mouth  raised  sufiiciently  to  clear  water  surface.  The 
inhalation  occurs  during  the  last  half  of  the  upper  arm  pull,  or  during  the 
latter  part  of  count  Two!  During  the  remainder  of  the  stroke  the  face 
is  turned  to  the  side  or  submerged  preparatory  to  the  inhalation  or  exhal- 
ation. 

FIRST   WATER  DRILL. 

Arm  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand  in  the  water ;  submerge  the  shoulders.  During  this  drill,  the  ex- 
tended right  arm  remains  at  the  side  of  the  body.     The  relaxed  left  arm 


90  SIVIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

is  near  the  thigh  and  in  position  for  the  recovery,  elbow  sHghtly  flexed, 
back  of  hand  resting  on  water  surface.  The  head  is  turned  shghtly  to  the 
left.     Fig.  1,  Page  72>. 

The  first  water  drill  is  a  detailed  analysis  of  the  upper  arm  during 
the  complete  stroke. 

Upper  arm — Bend  ! 

The  recovery  of  the  upper  or  left  arm  is  simplified  by  first  raising  the 
flexed  elbow  high  enough  to  bring  the  extended  wrist  and  lowered  hand 
just  above  the  water  surface,  in  front  of  and  away  from  the  head.  Fig. 
2.  Page  72>. 

Upper  arm  in  position  for  the  catch — Place ! 

The  catch  is  executed  by  extending  the  arm  forward,  finishing  with 
the  hand  about  six  inches  under  the  water,  face  submerged.  In  extending 
the  arm  forward  be  careful  not  to  over  reach,  thereby  greatly  depressing 
the  shoulder.     Fig.  3.  Page  72). 

Upper  arm — Pull ! 

The  arm  pull  or  drive  is  executed  forcibly  and  straight  down  through 
the  water  and  close  to  the  body.  Be  careful  not  to  pull  in  a  zigzag  fashion. 
Fig.  4.  Page  72). 

Upper  arm  in  position   for  the  finish — Place  ! 

The  finish  of  the  stroke  is  executed  with  the  arm  partially  flexed,  back 
or  hand  resting  on  water  surface.     Fig.  1,  Page  72. 

Repeat  this  drill  until  it  is  mastered  and  the  recovery  of  the  upper  arm 
out  of  the  water  becomes  easy  and  natural. 

SECOND  WATER   DRILI.. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand  in  the  shallow  end  of  the  pool;  submerge  the  shoulders.  Then 
assume  the  correct  starting  position  for  the  arm  motion ;  right  arm  ex- 
tended, hand  about  six  inches  under  the  water  surface,  palm  down,  the 
left  arm  in  position  for  the  recovery  near  the  thigh,  elbows  slightly  flexed, 
back  of  hand  resting  on  water's  surface. 

Pull  right,  recover  over  left,  exhale — One ! 

Pull  left,  recover  over  right,  inhale — Two  ! 

Practice  the  complete  arm  motion,  applying  the  description  given  in  the 
preceding  drill.  Then  practice  the  complete  arm  motion  with  breathing. 
During  the  latter  part  of  count  One!  turn  the  head;  submerge  the  face; 
exhale  through  the  nose,  during  the  latter  part  of  count  Two!  turn  the 
head  slightly  to  the  left,  mouth  raised  sufficiently  to  clear  water  surface ; 
inhale.  During  the  remainder  of  the  stroke  the  face  is  turned  to  the  side 
or  submerged  preparatory  to  the  inhalation  or  exhalation. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  91 

FIRST  WATER  DRILL. 

2.  Leg  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Face  the  side  of  the  tank,  grasp  the  raiHng  and  assume  the  face  sub- 
merged floating  position ;  that  is,  legs  extended,  knees  slightly  apart,  toes 
pointing,  ankles  relaxed.     Fig.   1.   Page  25. 

Crawl-kick,  exhale — One  ! 

Crawl-kick,  inhale — Two  ! 

First  practice  the  crawl-kick  with  the  head  raised,  then  with  breathing. 
The  crawl-kick  consists  of  a  series  of  quick  alternate  up  and  down  leg 
thrashes  of  even  length.  The  leg  drive  extends  from  the  hips  to  the 
pointed  toes,  the  thrash  being  about  eight  inches  and  not  more  than  four- 
teen. At  first,  work  the  legs  slowly  until  a  correct  and  easy  rhythm  is 
established. 

Each  downward  movement  of  the  legs  constitutes  a  beat.  Practice  the 
correct  timing  of  the  stroke  by  using  two,  three,  or  four  beats  to  each 
count  or  inhalation  or  exhalation.  The  application  of  the  above  rule  for 
the  six-beat  crawl  is  as  follows:    Exhale;  left,  right,  left  leg  kick. 

Inhale ;  right,  left,  right  leg  kick.  The  drive  or  force  of  the  kick  occurs 
as  the  heels  come  together  and  the  recovery  or  relaxation  occurs  when 
they  separate.  Be  careful  not  to  raise  the  feet  above  the  water  surface,  or 
noticeably  bend  the  knees,  as  energy  is  lost. 

SECOND  AVATER  DRILL. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Start  from  the  face-submerged-push-off  position.  Inhale,  push  away 
with  the  arms  and   legs   extended.     Figs.  2  and  3.   Page  29. 

Crawl-kick — One ! 

Crawl-kick — Two  ! 

Practice  the  crawl-kick,  propelling  the  body  across  the  pool  about 
fifteen  feet.     Then  regain  standing  position. 

3.  Combination  of  Arm  and  Leg  Motions — The  Coordinated  Stroke. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Start  from  the  face-submerged-push-ofif  position,  but  grasp  the  railing 
with  the  left  hand,  right  arm  resting  on  water  surface.    Inhale ;  push  away. 
Pull  right,  recover  over  left,  kick,  exhale — One! 
Pull  left,  recover  over  right,  kick,  inhale — Two ! 
Figs.  3,  4  and  5.  Page  87. 

Important  Note. — As  the  left  arm  recovers  forward,  submerge  the  face 
and  exhale.     Begin  the  forcible  arm  pull  with  the  right  hand  about  six 


92  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

inches  ander  the  water,  thus  getting  a  good  leverage,  and  continue 
the  downward  pull,  keeping  the  arm  close  to  the  hody.  At  the  same 
time  begin  the  crawl  kick  with  the  left  leg.  Remember  to  recover  with  the 
hand  low  to  the  water,  elbow  raised  and  slightly  flexed.  Counts  One !  and 
Two!  should  be  executed  as  one  continuous  motion.  The  number  of  leg 
thrashes  during  the  complete  stroke  varies  from  two  to  eight  beats,  depend- 
ing upon  the  ability  of  the  individual  and  the  speed  of  the  stroke.  The 
six-beat  crawl  has  proven  the  most  satisfactory. 

The  i^osition  of  the  head,  that  is,  face  submerged  or  partially  submerged, 
depends  upon  the  buoyancy  of  the  individual.  Those  having  unusual 
buoyancy  or  floating  ability,  would  probably  have  to  swim  with  the  eyes 
above  the  water  surface  in  order  to  regulate  the  correct  body  balance,  and 
prevent  the  feet  from  coming  out  of  the  water.  On  the  other  hand,  when 
one  lacks  the  natural  body  buoyancy,  the  face  should  be  submerged  in 
order  to  keep  the  feet  from  dragging,  thereby  maintaining  the  correct 
body  balance. 

Many  of  our  noted  Hawaiian  swimmers  have  demonstrated  the  value 
of  the  surf-board  as  a  means  of  learning  the  crawl.  They  naturally 
acquire  a  correct  catch  position  and  arm  pull,  and  also  a  powerful  leg 
drive.  Furthermore,  by  this  method  they  develop  an  independent  arm  and 
leg  action.  An  easy  and  correct  coordination  is  unconsciously  established. 
Refer  to  the  instructors'  note  for  the  craw^l  stroke,  page  165. 

DON'T 

Don't  raise  the  head  high  above  the  water  when  inhaling,  because 
this  sinks  the  feet  and  disturbs  the  body  balance. 

Don't  swim  with  the  head  held  high  out  of  the  water,  because  this 
causes  the  body  to  drag. 

Don't  swim  with  the  head  submerged,  because  this  impedes  progress. 

Don't  change  the  body  position  from  the  chest  to  the  side  when 
breathing,  because  this  disturbs  the  body  balance. 

Don't  permit  the  arms  to  reco^'er  with  the  elbow  dragging  in  the 
water  and  hand  high,  because  this  offers  resistance  and  retards  progress. 

Don't  finish  the  arm  recoAcry  by  crossing  the  hands  in  front  of  the 
head,  because  this  decreases  the  length  of  the  arm  pull. 

Don't  finish  the  recovery  with  the  arms  too  far  apart  as  this  causes 
a  loss  of  energy  and  leverage  in  the  pull. 

Don't  swim  with  the  fingers  apart,  as  this  diminishes  the  pulling 
power. 

Don't  bring  the  hands  high  out  of  the  water  at  the  finish  of  the  arm 
pull,  because  it  is  energy  wasted. 


sin  MM  INC  SIMPLnniil)  93 

Don't  greatly  depress  the  shoulder  during  the  catch  of  the  stroke, 
as  this  causes  an  unnecessary  body  roll. 

Don't  attempt  the  arm  pull  in  a  zigzag  fashion,  because  force  is  lost. 

Don't  execute  the  crawl  kick  by  noticeably  bending  the  knees  or 
bring  the  feet  high  out  of  the  water,  because  this  limits  the  drive  to  the 
lower  leg.  and  energy  is  lost. 

Don't  attempt  to  swim  the  crawl  kick  with  the  ankles  flexed  or 
rigid,  as  it  impedes  progress  and  is  fatiguing. 

Don't  attempt  to  swim  the  crawl  kick  with  the  legs  far  apart,  as  this 
retards  progress. 

AUSTRALIAN  CRAWL 

The  Australian  crawl  is  advisable  for  the  individual  having  rigid  ankles 
who,  because  of  this,  would  not  be  able  to  swim  the  crawl  effectively.  This 
stroke  differs  from  the  crawl  in  that  it  is  composed  of  an  alternating  arm 
and  leg  motion  which  causes  the  body  to  roll  from  side  to  side.  The  force 
of  the  kick  is  derived  from  the  alternating  forcible  knee  flexions,  which 
limit  the  thrash  to  the  lower  leg.  In  other  words,  while  the  left  arm  is 
pulling  through  the  water,  the  right  leg  is  exerting  a  forcible  downward 
thrash,  and  vice  versa. 

RACING  BACK  OR  ALTERNATE  OVER-ARM-BACK-STROKE 

This  is  the  speediest  of  all  back  strokes.  Having  learned  the  crawl,  the 
transition  to  the  racing  back  is  a  simple  matter ;  the  leg  drive  is  similar  and 
the  arms  alternate  in  their  pull.  The  double  over-arm-back  stroke  is 
another  form  of  the  racing  back  strokes,  differing  from  the  alternate  over 
arm  in  that  both  arms  recover  simultaneously.  However,  this  stroke  is 
the  less  effective  of  the  two. 

The  progressive  steps  in  learning  or  teaching  this  stroke  are  the  same 
as  given  in  the  crawl  stroke. 

LAND   DRILL 

Breathing. 

Inhale  through  the  mouth  on  count  One !  Exhale  through  the  mouth 
on  count  Two  ! 

FIRST   LAM)   DRILL. 

1.  Arm  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

The  starting  position  for  the  first  land  drill  is  as  follows:  Stand,  body 
erect,  feet  together,  right  arm  raised  to  vertical  position  and  close  to  the 


94  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

head,    elbows    slightly   flexed,    palm   out,   the   left   arm   at   the   side,    palm 
touching  the  body.     Fig.  1.  Page  95. 

Pull  right,  recover  back  left,  inhale — One! 
While  the  extended  right  arm  is  forcibly  pulling  down  to  the  right  side, 
causing  the  body  to  turn  slightly  in  that  direction ;  the  left  arm  is  recover- 
ing back,  elbow  raised,  the  hand  close  to  the  body,  following  the  medium 
line  to  reach  position  above  the  head,  finishing  with  the  palm  out.     Figs. 

1,  2  and  3.  Page  95. 

Pull  left,  recover  back  right,  exhale — Two ! 

Execute  count  One !  substituting  left  arm  for  the  pull,  right  arm  for 
the  recovery.   Figs.  3,  4  and   1.   Page  95. 

Motion  Picture  Land  Drill. 

Practice  the  above  land  drill,  taking  one  step  backward  during  each  arm 
pull,  or  count.  This  serves  as  a  motion  picture  land  drill,  illustrating  the 
propelling  power  of  the  stroke. 

2,  Leg  Motion. 
Crawl-kick,  inhale — One  ! 

Raise  the  extended  left  leg  forward  about  six  inches,  toes  pointed  ;  then 
replace  it. 

Crawl-kick,  inhale — One  ! 

Raise  the  extended  right  leg  forward  about  six  inches,  toes  pointed ; 
then  replace  it. 

3,  Combination  of  Arm  and  Leg  Motions — The  Coordinated  Stroke. 

The  coordination  of  the  racing  back  stroke  consists  of  the  combination 
of  arm  and  leg  motions  according  to  counts  One!  and  Two!  Figs.  1,  2,  3, 
and  4.  Page  95. 

Pull  right,  recover  back  left,  kick,  inhale — One! 

Pull  left,  recover  back  right,  kick,  exhale — Two ! 

For  the  complete  analysis  of  the  correct  timing  or  coordination  of  the 
stroke,  refer  to  the  crawl  combination  of  arm  and  leg  motions,  first  land 
drill.     Page  88. 

SECOND  LAND   DRILL. 

1.  Arm  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

The  starting  position  for  the  second  land  drill  is  as  follows  :  Lie  on 
the  back,  feet  together,  right  arm  extended  to  vertical,  elbow  slightly 
flexed,  palm  out,  left  arm  at  the  side,  palm  touching  body. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


95 


The  Racing  Back  or  Alternate  Over  Arm  back  Stroke  ,}''S^„.^^ 
2  3  and  4.  Illustrate  counts  One!  and  Two!  of  the  land  drill  big. 
5      Catch  position  of  the  right  arm.     Fig.  6.     Recovery  of  right  arm. 


96  .S-[/7.1/.l//.VG-  SIMPLIFIED 

Pull  right,  recover  back  left,  inhale — One! 
Pull  left,  recover  back  right,  exhale — Two  ! 

Counts  One!  and  Two!  of  the  arm  motion  are  the  same  as  described  in 
the  first  land  drill. 

2.  Leg  Motion. 
Crawl-kick,  inliale — One  ! 

Practice  the  alternate  up  and  down  leg  thrashes  while  on  the  back,  with 
a  drive  of  from  eight  to  fourteen  inches,  keeping  the  legs  and  ankles 
extended,  though  slightly  relaxed. 

Crawl-kick,  exhale — Two  ! 

Repeat  count  One ! 

3.  Combmation  of  Arm  and  Leg  Motions— The  Coordinated  Stroke. 
The   coordination   of   the   racing   back   stroke,   taken   b'ing  down,   is   the 

same  as  described  in  the  first  land  drills. 

Pull  right,  recover  back  left,  kick,  inhale — One! 

Pull  left,  recover  back  right,  kick,  exhale — Two  ! 

Important  Note. — While  the  right  arm  is  forcibly  pulling,  the  relaxed 
left  arm  is  recovering.  Open  the  legs  easily  during  the  recovery,  and 
forcibly  bring  them  together  during  the  drive. 

WATER   DRILL 

Breathing. 

The  breathing  should  be  natural.  The  rhythm  of  the  breathing  may 
vary,  depending  u;  en  the  need  of  the  individual  and  the  speed  of  the 
stroke. 

L  Arm  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Start  from  the  back-push-ofif  position.     Figs.  4  and  5.  Page  ?)7. 

Then  push  away  from  the  side  of  the  tank  and  remain  in  correct  true 
floating  position  until  the  body  almost  ceases  its  forward  glide.  Keep  the 
head  well  back,  chin  in,  arms  at  the  side,  legs  extended,  toes  pointed,  knees 
about  two  inches  apart. 

Pull  right,  recover  back  left,  inhale — One! 

Then  begin  swimming-  on  the  back  with  the  arms  alone,  as  described  in 
the  above  land  drills.  The  arm  pull  should  be  about  four  inches  under  the 
water,  body  rolling  slightly  to  the  side  of  the  pulling  arm. 

Pull  left,  recover  back  right,  exhale — Two ! 

Having  executed  a  few  strokes,  regain  standing  position.  Practice 
the  arm  motion  until  it  is  executed  correctly  and  with  ease. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  97 

2.  Leg  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Start  from  the  back  push-ofif  position.  Push  away  and  assume  correct 
true  floating  position,  then  place  the  hands  on  the  hips. 

Crawl-kick,  inhale — One  ! 

Begin  swimming  with  the  legs  alone  as  described  in  the  second  land 
drill. 

Crawl-kick,  exhale — Two  ! 

Important  Note. — Be  careful  not  to  bend  the  knees  greatly  or  flex  the 
ankles.  Having  executed  a  few  fast  and  rhythmical  crawl-kicks  ;  regain 
standing  position.  Practice  this  drill  until  it  is  executed  correctly  and  with 
ease. 

3.  Combination  of  Arm  and  Leg  Motions — The  Coordinated  Stroke. 
Starting  position — Take  ! 

Start  from  the  back-push-ofif  position.  Push  away  and  remain  in  cor- 
rect true  floating  position. 

Pull  right,  recover  back  left,  kick,  inhale — One ! 
Pull  left,  recover  back  right,  kick,  exhale — Two ! 

Important  Note. — Figs.  5  and  6.  Page  95.  While  swimming  this 
stroke,  during  the  arm  motions  recover  with  the  elbows  raised  sufficiently 
to  clear  water  surface,  hand  close  to  the  body,  following  the  median  line. 
Keep  the  head  well  back,  chin  in,  body  in  correct  true  floating  position. 

Slightly  turn  or  roll  the  body  to  the  side  of  the  pulling  arm.  Like  the 
crawl,  this  stroke  has  a  two,  four,  six,  or  eight  beat  leg  drive.  Begin  the 
stroke  by  pulling  with  the  right  arm  and  executing  the  first  beat  with  the 
left  leg,  finish  the  complete  stroke  by  pulling  with  the  left  arm  and  execut- 
ing the  last  beat  with  the  right  leg. 

Refer  to  instructors'  note  for  the  racing  back  stroke.     Page  165. 


DON'T 

Don't  swim  with  the  head  held  forward,  ]:)ecausc  this  sinks  the  feet 
and  is  fatiguing. 

Don't  raise  the  hand  high  above  the  body  during  the  arm  recovery, 
as  this  tends  to  sink  the  body. 

Don't  finish  the  arm  recovery  in  a  half  flexed  position,  as  this 
diminishes  the  length  of  the  arm  pull. 

Don't  permit  the  elbows  to  drag  through  the  water  on  the  recovery, 
as  it  retards  progress. 


98  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

Don't  attempt  the  crawl-kick  without  pointing  the  toes,  because  this 
decreases  the  power  of  the  kick. 

Don't  attempt  to  swim  the  racing  back  stroke  with  the  bod}^  in  a 
half  sitting  position,  because  this  impedes  progress  and  tends  to  sink 
the  body. 

THE  BREAST  STROKE 

This  stroke  may  be  used  in  life-saving  as  a  substitute  for  the  trudgeon 
or  crawl.  The  logical  place  for  the  breast  stroke  is  at  the  end  of  the 
series,  as  it  is  not  a  foundation  stroke,  and  is  not  directly  related  to  any 
of  the  preceding  strokes  and  furthermore  it  is  complex  and  difficult. 

The  progressive  steps  in  learning  or  teaching  this  stroke  are : 

(1)  Careful  analysis  of  the  land  drills,  arm  motions. 

(2)  Application  of  the  above  land  drills,  arm  motions,  in  the  water. 

(3)  Careful  analysis  of  the  land  drills,  leg  motions. 

(4)  Application  of  the  above  land  drills,  leg  motions,  in  the  water. 

(5)  Careful  analysis  of  the  land  drills,  combined  arm  and  leg  motions. 

(6)  Application  of  the  above  land  drills,  combined  arm  and  leg  motions, 
in  the  water. 

Refer  to  the  cardinal  points  concerning  swimming,  page  43. 

LAND   DRILL 

Breathing. 

Inhale  through  the  mouth  during  counts  One !  and  Two  !  by  turning 
the  head  slightly  to  the  side  or  front ;  exhale  through  the  nose,  lowering 
the  head  during  counts  Three !  and  Four ! 

FIRST   LAND   DRILL. 

1.  Arm.  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

(1)  Stand,  body  erect,  arms  to  vertical,  thumbs  touching,  palms  for- 
ward. 

(2)  Assume  the  above  described  position  ;  then  bend  the  body  forward 
to  the  imaginary  water  line.  If  desired,  the  first  land  drill  may  be  analyzed 
according  to  starting  positions  one  or  two. 

(3)  Stand,  body  erect,  arms  in  front  horizontal  position,  thum1)s  touch- 
ing, fingers  together,  palms  down,  head  low.  The  first  land  drill  will  be 
analyzed  according  to  this  starting  position.     Fig.  1.  Page  99. 

Pull  sideways,  inhale — One  ! 

Turn  the  backs  of  the  hands  towards  each  other  and  forcibly  bring  the 
arms  to  the  side  horizontal  position.     Fig.  2.   Page  99. 
Bend,  inhale — Two  ! 


SU'IMMIXi''  SIMPLII'IRP 


99 


The   Breast   Stroke.      Fig.    1.     Starting  position.      Figs.   2.   3   and  4. 
Illustrate  counts  One!   Two!   and  Three!  of   the  land  drill. 


100  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

Relax  the  arms :  bend  the  elbows ;  bring  the  arms  in  a  semicircular 
motion  towards  the  chest,  finishing  with  the  hands  in  front  of  the  chest, 
thumbs  touching,  palms  down.     Fig.  3.  Page  99. 

Extend,  exhale — Three  ! 

Slowly  extend  the  arms  to  starting  position.     Fig.  4.  Page  99. 

Hold,  exhale^Four ! 

This  position  is  the  same  as  starting  position.     Fig.  1.  Page  99. 

Motion  Picture  Land  Drill. 

Practice  the  above  land  drill,  taking  one  step  forward  during  the  arm 
pull,  or  count.  This  serves  as  a  motion  picture  land  drill,  illustrating  the 
propelling  power  of  the  stroke. 

2.  Leg  Motion. 

Hold,  exhale — One! 

This  position  is  the  same  as  starting  position.     Fig.  2.  Page  99. 
Bend,  inhale — Two  ! 

Slowly  bring  the  sole  of  one  foot  up  along  the  side  of  the  supporting 
leg  to  the  knee.     Keep  the  knee  well  back.     Fig.  3.  Page  99. 
Extend,  exhale — Three  ! 

Flex  the  ankle ;  forcibly  extend  the  leg  to  the  side.    Fig.  4.  Page  99. 
Snap  together,  exhale — Four  ! 
Forcibly  bring  the  legt  to  starting  position.     Fig.  1.  Page  99. 

3.  Combination  of  Arm  and  Leg  Motions — The  Coordinated  Stroke. 

The  coordination  of  the  breast  stroke  consists  of  the  combination  of 
arm  and  leg  motions  according  to  counts  One !  Two !  Three  !  and  Four  1 

Pull  arm  sideways,  inhale — One  ! 

Bend  both,  inhale — Two  ! 

Extend  both,  exhale — Three  ! 

Snap  legs  together,  exhale — Four ! 

Figs.   1,  2,  3  and  4.   Page  99. 

Important  Note. — Count  one !  which  is  the  arm  pull,  must  be  executed 
forcibly.  Counts  Two!  and  Three!  are  a  combination  of  the  arm  and  leg 
motions.  Counts  Three!  and  Four!,  the  leg  drive,  must  be  executed 
forcibly. 

SECOND  I>AND   DRILL. 

1.  Arm  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

The  starting  position  for  the  second  land  drill  is  as  follows  :  Lie  face 
down,  arms  extended  to  vertical  position,  thumbs  touching,  palms  down, 
extended  legs  together  and  over  edge  of  pool. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  101 

Pull  sideways,  inhale — One  ! 

Counts  One  !  Two !  Three !  and  Four !  are  the  same  as  described  in  the 
first  land  drill,  arm  motion. 
Bend,  inhale — Two  ! 
Extend,  exhale — Three  ! 
Hold,  exhale — Four  ! 

2.  Leg  Motion. 

Hold,  inhale — One  ! 

This  position  is  the  same  as  starting  position. 

Bend,  inhale — Two  ! 

Slowly  bend  the  knees,  separating  them  as  far  apart  as  possible,  heels 
touching,  toes  pointed. 

Extend,  exhale — Three  ! 

Flex  the  ankles  and  extend  the  legs  to  the  side,  pushing  forcibly  with 
the  soles  of  the  feet. 

Snap  together,  exhale — Four  ! 

Forcibly  bring  the  legs  together. 

3.  Combination  of  Arm  and  Leg  Motions— The  Coordinated  Stroke 

The  coordination  of   the  l)rcast  stroke  taken   lying  down   is  the   same 
as  described  in  the  first  land  drill. 
Pull  arms  sideways,  inhale — One ! 
Bend  both,  inhale — Two  ! 
Extend  both,  exhale — Three  ! 
Snap  legs  together,  exhale — Four ! 


WATKR   DRILL 

Breathing*. 

Inhale  through  the  mouth  during  counts  One !  and  Two  !  by  raising  the 
head  or  turning  it  slightly  to  the  left ;  exhale  through  the  nose  during 
counts  Three !  and  Four !  submerging  the  face. 

FIRST  WATER  DRILL. 

1.  Arm  Motion. 

Starting  position- — Take  ! 

Stand   in   the   pool,   shoulders    submerged,    arms   extended    front    hori- 
zontal, thumbs  touching,  fingers  together,  pahns  resting  on  water  surface. 
Pull  sideways,  inhale— One  ! 


102  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

Practice  the  arm  motion  as  described  in  the  above  land  drills,  first 
executing  the  drill  with  the  head  raised  above  water  surface,  then  practice 
the  arm  motion  with  breathing.  Finish  the  arm  pull  with  the  arms  about 
four  inches  under  the  water. 

Bend,  inhale — Two  ! 

Extend,  exhale — Three  ! 

Hold,  exhale — Four  ! 

SECOND  WATER  DRII.I.. 

Starting  position — Take! 

Start  from  the  face-submerged  push-off  position.  Inhale ;  push  away 
and  assume  a  correct  face-submerged  floating  position.  Figs.  2  and  3. 
Page  29. 

Pull  sideways,  inhale — One  ! 

Practice  the  arm  motion  as  described  in  the  above  land  and  water 
drills,  first  executing  the  drill  with  the  head  submerged,  holding  the  breath  ; 
then  practice  the  arm  motion  with  breathing. 

Bend,  inhale — Two  ! 

Extend,  exhale — Three  ! 

Flold,  exhale — Four  ! 

Important  Note. — Having  executed  a  few  strokes  regain  standing 
position.     Practice  this  until  it  is  executed  correctly  and  with  ease. 

FIRST  WATER  DRII.E, 

2.  Leg  Motion. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Face  the  side  of  the  tank,  grasp  the  railing  with  the  left  hand;  place 
the  palm  of  the  right  hand  against  the  side  of  the  tank  about  eight  inches 
under  the  water,  with  the  fingers  pointing  down,  thumb  out. 

Hold,  inhale — One  ! 

Practice  the  leg  kick  as  described  in  the  second  land  drill,  first  execut- 
ing the  drill  with  the  head  raised  above  water  surface ;  then  practice  the 
leg  motion  with  breathing. 

Bend,  inhale — Two  ! 

Extend,  exhale — Three  ! 

Snap  together,  exhale — Four  ! 

SECOND  WATER   DRILE. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Start  from  the  face-submerged-push-off  position.  Inhale ;  push  away 
and  assume  the  correct  face-submerged-floating  position.  Figs.  2  and  3. 
Page  29. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


103 


■     The   Breast   Stroke.     Fig.    1.     Starting   position.     Figs    2    3   and  4. 
Illustrate   counts    One!   Two!   and   Three!    ot   the   water   drill. 


104  SJVIMMIXG  SIMPLIFIED 

Hold,  inhale — One  ! 

Practice  the  leg  kick  as  described  in  the  second  land  drill,  first  execut- 
ing the  drill  with  the  head  submerged,  holding  the  breath;  then  practice 
the  leg  motion  with  breathing. 

Bend,  inhale — Two  ! 

Extend,  exhale — Three  ! 

Snap  together,  exhale — Four  ! 

3.  Combination  of  Arm  and  Leg  Motions— The  Coordinated  Stroke 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

The  starting  position  is  the  same  as  described  for  the  leg  motion  in 
the  second  water  drill. 

Pull  arms  sideways,  inhale — One  ! 

Begin  swimming  with  the  arms  and  legs  together  as  described  under 
the  coordinated  stroke  in  the  above  land  drills.  Figs.  1,  2,  3  and  4,  Page  103. 

Bend  both,  inhale — Two  ! 

Extend  both,  exhale — Three  ! 

Snap  legs  together,  exhale — Four ! 

Important  Note. — Execute  the  arm  and  leg  motions  as  one  continuous 
movement  with  as  little  jerk  to  the  stroke  as  possible.  A  slight  hold  at  tne 
end  of  the  fourth  count  is  advisable  as  a  means  of  resting  the  body  during 
the  forward  glide.  However,  for  racing  purposes  omit  the  hold.  Refer  to 
tlie  important  note  given  in  the  first  land  drill,  for  the  combination  of  arm 
and  leg  motions. 

Refer  to  instructors'  note   for  breast  stroke.     Page  165. 


DON'T 

Don't  swim  with  the  head  held  too  high  out  of  the  water,  because 
this  causes  the  body  to  drag. 

Don't  apply  force  on  the  second  count  while  the  arms  and  legs  are 
being  flexed,  because  this  retards  progress. 

Don't  kick  down  against  the  water,  for  in  this  way  force  is  lost 
during  the  leg  drive. 

Don't  forget  on  count  Three!  to  push  forcibly  against  the  water 
with  the  soles  of  the  feet,  ankles  flexed,  because  lack  of  force  here  im- 
pedes progress. 

Don't  forget  to  keep  the  body  parallel  with  and  as  near  wat^^r  sur- 
face as  possible,  since  in  this  position  one  oft'ers  less  resistance,  and 
avoids  body  drag. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  105 


IV 


RACING  TURN— TREADING  WATER— PLUNGE  FOR 

DISTANCE 

RACING  TURN 

Speed   swimming    requires    the    knowledge    of    a   correct   rapid    turn    in 
either  direction. 

The  progressive  steps  in  learning  or  teaching  the  racing  turn  are  : 

(1)  Careful  analysis  of  the  land  drill,  combined  arm  and  leg  motions. 

(2)  Application  of  the  above  land  drill,  combined  arm  and  leg  motions 
in  the  water. 

I.AND   DRILL, 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand  a  few  feet  from  the  wall,  bend  the  body  forward  to  the  imagin- 
ary water  line. 

Touch  wall — One  ! 

Touch  the  wall  with  the  hand  of  the  flexed  recovering  left  arm,  fingers 
pointing  to  the  right.  The  right  arm  at  the  side  of  the  body.  Fig.  1. 
Page   107. 

Inhale — Two  ! 

Turn  body — Three  ! 

Turn  the  body  to  the  right  by  pushing  hard  against  the  wall  with  the 
left  hand,  at  the  same  time  quickly  bring  the  right  arm  to  the  rear  of  the 
hips ;  then  forcibly  push  the  body  back  against  the  wall,  with  a  forward 
scooping  motion,  finishing  with  the  right  arm  in  front  horizontal,  palm  up. 
Place  the  sole  of  the  left  foot  against  the  wall;  lower  the  head;  place  both 
arms  in  a  front  horizontal  position,  thumbs  touching,  palms  down.  Figs. 
2  and  3.  Page  107. 

Push  away,  exhale — Four  ! 

Forcibly  extend  the  leg  and  push  the  body  away  from  the  wall. 

Important  Note. — The  above  land  drill  may  be  practiced  in  the  same 
manner  starting  with  the  right  hand  touching  the  wall,  as  shown  in  the 
figures.     If  the  right  hand  touches  the  wall  the  body  must  turn  to  the  left. 

WATER   DRILL, 
FIRST  WATER  DRILL. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand  in  the  water  a  few  feet  from  the  side  of  the  tank,  shoulders 
submerged.  Then  assume  the  correct  starting  position  for  the  arms  as 
described  in  the  trudgeon  stroke,  arm  motion. 


106  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

Touch  wall — One  ! 

Counts  One  !  Two  !  Three  !  and  Four  !  are  the  same  as  described  in  the 
above  land  drill  and  should  be  executed  quickly  and  forcibly  as  one  con- 
tinuous motion. 

Inhale — Two ! 

Turn  body — Three  ! 

Push  aw.ay,  exhale — Four  ! 

Forcibly  push  away  and  glide  in  the  face-submerged-push-off  position, 
then  regain  standing  position. 

SECOM>  ^VATEB   DKII.I.. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Swim  towards  the  side  of  the  tank  with  a  trudgeon  or  crawl  stroke. 
When  nearing  the  side  of  the  pool  adjust  the  distance  by  taking  a  few 
shorter  strokes  or  lengthen  the  stroke,  in  order  that  the  hand  of  either 
flexed  arm  will  touch  the  wall. 

Touch  wall — One  ! 

Touch  the  wall  with  the  hand  of  the  flexed  recovering  left  arm,  fingers 
pointing  to  the  right,  hand  just  above  water  surface,  the  right  arm  at  the 
side  of  the  body.  Remember  that  if  the  left  hand  touches  the  wall  the 
body  must  turn  to  the  right  and  vice  versa.     Fig.  4.  Page  107. 

Inhale — Two  ! 

Inhale  through  the  mor.th,  raising  it  sufiiciently  to  clear  water  surface. 

Turn  body — Three  ! 

Submerge  the  head  :  turn  the  body  (|uickly  to  the  right,  by  pushing  hard 
against  the  wall  with  the  left  hand.  At  the  same  time  bring  the  right  arm 
to  the  rear  of  the  hips  ;  then  forcibly  push  the  body  as  near  the  side  of 
the  tank  as  possible  with  a  forward  scooping  motion,  finishing  with  the 
arms  in  front  horizontal  position,  palms  down.  At  the  same  time,  bend 
the  knees  and  place  the  soles  of  the  feet  against  the  side  of  the  tank  about 
eight  inches  under  the  water.     Fig.  5.   Page   107. 

Push  away— Four ! 

Forcibly  push  away  from  the  side  of  the  tank  and  glide  in  the  face- 
submerged-push-ofl^  position.  Before  the  momentum  of  the  glide  ceases, 
if  one  swims  the  crawl,  begin  the  leg  thrash,  then  the  arm  movement. 

If  one  swims  the  trudgeon  stroke,  begin  the  arm  movement  first.  Prac- 
tice the  turn  until  it  can  be  done  correctly  and  with  ease.     Fig.  6.  Page  107. 

Refer  to  instructors"  note  for  Racirig  Turn.     Page  166. 

DON'T 

Don't  forget  to  inhale  before  the  turn,  as  a  deep  breath  is  necessary 
for  the  glide. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


107 


Raci 
3.     Push 


ne-    Turn      Fig.    1.     The    Touch.      Fig.    2.     Body    Turn. 
;!\>ff      Fig.  4      The  Touch.     Fig.  5.     The  Push-off. 


108  SJVIMMIXG  SIMPLIFIED 

Don't  forget  to  flex  the  elbow  of  the  hand  touching  the  wall,  as  this 
makes  a  quick  and  correct  turn  possible. 

Don't  forget  to  use  the  free  arm  as  a  means  of  pushing  the  body 
back  towards  the  side  of  the  tank,  as  this  is  necessary  in  gaining  the 
correct  push-ofif  position. 

Don't  attempt  to  push  away  with  the  legs  extended,  soles  of  feet  far 
below  the  \vater  surface,  because  the  push  away  would  be  impossible. 

TREADING  WATER 

Treading  water  is  of  value  in  life-saving,  water  sports,  and  as  a  means 
of  resting  the  body  while  swimming. 

WATER   DRILL, 
FIRST  WATER  DRILL. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Start  with  the  body  in  a  vertical  floating  position,  head  slightly  back, 
chin  up,  arms  side  horizontal  or  hands  on  hips. 

Flex  left  knee,  extend  right  knee — One ! 

The  body  is  raised  slightly  out  of  the  water  by  continuous  alternate  leg 
flexions  and  extensions.  While  the  left  knee  is  being  slightly  flexed,  ankle 
extended  ;  the  right  knee  is  being  forcibly  extended,  ankle  flexed,  pushing 
down  against  the  water.     This  movement  resembles  walking  upstairs. 

Flex  right  knee,  extend  left  knee — Two  ! 

Repeat  count  One!  starting  with  the  right  leg  and  finishing  with  the 
left. 

SECOND  WATER   DRILL, 

Practice  treading  water  as  described  above  in  addition  use  a  sculling 
arm  motion. 

PLUNGE  FOR  DISTANCE 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Assume  correct  starting  position  for  a  shallow  dive.  Before  taking  the 
plunge  breathe  in  and  out  deeply  three  or  four  times.     Fig.  A.  Page  113. 

Dive — In  ! 

After  the  last  inhalation,  forcibly  spring  forward,  enter  the  water  with 
the  body  in  a  straight  line ;  that  is,  arms  and  legs  ex:tended,  heels  and 
knees  touching,  toes  pointed.  Fig.  5.  Page  113.  The  depth  one  should 
assume  depends  upon  the  body  buoyancy  and  build  of  the  individual.  It 
varies  from  three  to  five  feet.  Gradually  rise  to  the  surface,  keeping  the 
body  extended.  Continue  the  plunge  until  the  momentum  of  the  glide  has 
ceased.  Fig.  6.  Page  107.  One  should  not  hold  the  breath  for  more  than 
one  minute. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  109 


DIVING 


Diving  is  essential  as  a  correct  means  of  entering  the  water,  is  also  of 
value  in  life-saving,  and  is  one  of  the  most  graceful  and  pleasurable  of 
aquatic  sports.  When  the  pupil  is  able  to  swim  one  or  more  strokes  cor- 
rectly and  with  perfect  confidence  in  deep  water,  diving  should  be  taught. 

The  progressive  steps  in  learning  or  teaching  diving  are  : 

(1)  The  Rudiments  of  Diving. 

(2)  Elementary  Diving. 

(3)  Advanced  Diving. 


THE  RUDIMENTS  OF  DIVING 

First  Step — The  Preliminary  Porpoise  Dive. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand  in  the  water,  waist  deep,  arms  front  horizontal,  palms  down, 
thumbs  locked,  head  down,  chin  touching  the  chest,  knees  slightly  flexed. 

Inhale ! 

Dive — In ! 

Quickly  dive  under  the  water  by  bending  forward,  at  the  same  time 
spring  ofif  the  bottom  of  the  -pool  by  straightening  the  flexed  knees.  When 
the  entire  body  is  submerged,  quickly  come  to  the  surface  by  pointing  the 
fingers  up  and  raising  the  head  and  shoulders. 

Second  Step — The  Sitting  Fall-In. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Sit  on  the  edge  of  the  pool,  feet  apart  resting  on  the  railing.  Bend  the 
body  forward  until  the  chin  touches  the  chest ;  extend  the  arms  in  front 
of  the  head  covering  the  ears,  thumbs  locked.     Fig.  1,  Page  111. 

Inhale ! 

Dive — In ! 

Enter  the  water,  holding  the  arms  and  head  in  starting  position  until 
the  body  is  submerged.  Then  quickly  come  to  the  surface.  Fig.  2.  Page 
111. 

Important  Note. — The  head  largely  controls  the  position  of  the  body, 
while  in  the  air  and  entering  the  water ;  it  acts  as  a  weight  carrying  it 
forward  and  under.  Wlien  the  body  is  submerged,  quickly  come  to  the 
surface  by  pointing  the  fingers  up  and  raiding  the  head  and  shoulders. 


110  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

Third  Step— Kneeling  Fall-In. 

Starting  position— Take ! 

Kneel  on  the  edge  of  the  pool,  arms  and  head  held  in  the  same  position 
as  described  in  the  second  step.     Fig.  3,  page  111,  and  Fig.  4.  page  115. 

Inhale ! 

Dive — In ! 

Refer  to  second  step  for  complete  description. 

Fourth  Step — Standing  Fall-In. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand,  toes  gripping  the  edge  of  the  pool,  body  bent  forward,  head 
down,  arms  extended,  thnmbs  locked.     Fig.  4.  Page  111. 

Inhale ! 

Dive — In ! 

Enter  the  water  b}-  rising  on  the  toes,  falling  forward,  holding  the 
entire  body  in  starting  position  until  it  is  submerged.  Remember  not  to 
stiffen  or  straighten  the  body  when  falling  forward  as  one  will  fall  flat 
on  the  water  surface.     Fig.  5.   Page  111. 


ELEMENTARY  DIVING 

After  the  novice  has  learned  the  above  progressive  rudimentary  steps 
he  IS  then  ready  for  elementary  diving. 

First  Step— Standing  Dive. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Assume  a  correct  starting  position,  toes  gripping  the  edge  of  pool, 
bend  the  body  forward  as  far  as  possible,  chin  touching  the  chest  ex- 
tended arms  m  front  of  the  head,  covering  the  ears,  thumbs  locked  Flex 
the  knees.     Fig.  1.  page  113,  and  Fig.  3.  page  115. 

Inhale ! 

Dive — In ! 

Enter  the  water  by  rising  on  the  toes  ;  quickly  straighten  the  knees. 
Hold  startmg  position,  head  down,  body  bent  forward  until  the  entire 
body  IS  submerged.  In  a  correct  elementary  dive  the  body  should  enter 
the  water  at  an  angle  of  about  forty-five  degrees,  arms  and  legs  extended 
ankles  touching,  toes  pointed,  thumbs  locked,  serving  as  a  protection  to 
the  head.     Fig.  2.  Page  113. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


111 


The  Rudiments  of  Diving.  Figs.  1  and  2.  Sitting  dive-startn.g 
position  and  dive  in.  Fig.  3.  Kneeling  d,ve-startmg  position.  Figs.  4 
and  5.     Standing  dive— starting  position  and  dive  ni. 


112  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

Second  Step — Standing  Dive. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

The  starting  position  is  the  same  as  described  for  the  preceding  dive, 
except  that  the  knees  are   straight.     Fig.  4.   Page   111. 

Inhale ! 

Dive— In  ! 

Execute-  the  spring  of  the  dive  by  quickly  bending  and  straightening 
the  knees.  Enter  the  water  with  the  head  down,  extended  arms  covering 
the  ears.     Fig.  2.  Page  113. 

Third  Step — Standing  Dive. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand,  body  erect,  feet  together,  toes  gripping  the  edge,  arms  front  hori- 
zontal and  about  twelve  inches  apart.     Fig.  3.   Page  113. 

Inhale ! 

Dive— In! 

Rise  on  the  toes  ;  bend  the  knees  and  forcibly  swing  the  arms  backward; 
then  quickly  straighten  the  knees  and  forcibly  swing  the  arms  over  and 
forward,  entering  the  water  with  the  thumbs  locked,  head  down.  Execute 
the  arm  swing  and  spring  as  one  continuous  motion. 

Fourth  Step — Standing  Dive. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

The  starting  position  is  the  same  as  described  for  the  preceding  dive. 
Fig.  1.   Page   115. 

Inhale ! 

Dive — In ! 

Execute  the  spring  aiul  at  the  same  time  quickly  and  forcibly  bend  the 
body  forzi'ard,  head  dozoi.  thumbs  locked.  Enter  the  water  as  described 
in  the  preceding  dive. 

Fifth  Step — Racing  Dive. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand  with  the  toes  gripping  the  edge  of  the  pool,  knees  flexed,  body 
bent  forward,  head  up.  extended  arms  to  the  rear.     Fig.  4,  Page  113. 

Inhale  ! 

Dive — In  ! 

As  the  arms  are  forcibly  extended  forward,  straighten  the  knees  and 
incline  the  body  forward,  jumping  out  as  far  as  possible.  While  in  the 
air  the  body  is  close  to  the  v/ater  surface,  arms  and  legs  extended,  head 
slightly  raised.  Enter  the  water  with  the  head  down,  body  just  under  the 
surface.  Then  lie  in  the  face-submerged  floating  position,  until  the  body 
glide  is  nearly  expended,  then  begin  swimming.     Fig.  5.  Page  113. 


SM'nf}[!XG  STMFIJFIF.D 


113 


Elementary  Diving.  Figs.  1  and  2.  Standing  dive  with  spring- 
starting  position  and  in.  Fig.  3.  Starting  position  for  a  plain  dive. 
Figs.  4  and  5.     Racing  dive — starting  position  and  in. 


114  SU'IMMIXG  SIMPLIFIED 

ADVANCED  DIVING 

The  following  dives  are  essential  as  a  foundation  for  the  more  ad- 
vanced and  fancy  diving..  Practice  on  a  regulation  spring-board  which  is 
at  least  three  feet  above  the  water. 

Spring  Board  Diving — The  Swan  Dive 

The  Preliminary  Steps  in  Learning  the  Swan  Dive  from  the  Spring- 
Board. 

First  Step — Arm  Swing  and  Spring. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand,  body  erect,  arms  at  the  side  of  the  body,  toes  gripping  the  edge 
of  board. 

Inhale ! 

Dive — In  ! 

Spring  up,  at  the  same  time  swing  the  arms  forward  and  up,  finishing 
in  side  horizontal  position.  Hold  the  swan  position  upon  leaving  the 
board,  then  enter  the  water  with  the  head  down,  arms  extended,  thumbs 
locked. 

Second  Step — Arm  Swing  and  Spring. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand,  body  erect,  arms  front  horizontal,  toes  gripping  the  edge  of  the 
board. 

Inhale ! 

Dive — In ! 

Rise  on  the  toes,  bend  the  knees,  and  forcibly  swing  the  arms  down  to 
the  side  of  the  body;  then  quickly  and  forcibly  straighten  the  knees  and 
swing  the  arms  forward  and  up,  finishing  in  side  horizontal  position. 
Quickly  execute  the  arm  swing  and  spring  as  one  continuous  motion.  Hold 
a  swan  position  upon  leaving  the  board  ;  then  enter  the  water  correctly. 

Third  Step — Learning  to  Work  the  Board. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand  near  the  end  of  the  board,  body  erect,  arms  at  the  side. 

(1)  In  learning  to  work  the  board  one  should  execute  three  or  four 
continuous  springs  in  place.  In  jumping  on  the  end  of  the  board,  light  on 
the  balls  of  both  feet,  knees  straight,  arms  at  the  side.  Rebound  from  the 
board  by  means  of  a  forcible  wide  arm  swing,  timed  with  the  board.  At 
first,  strive  for  correct  balance,  then  for  height.  Remember  to  keep  the 
body  perpendicular,   head   erect.     Fig.   \,   Page   \\7. 


SiriMMIXG  SIMPLIFIED 


115 


Class  Drill  in  Diving.  Fig.  1.  Land  drill  tor  diving.  Figs.  2  and 
4.  Starting  positions  for  rudimentary  diving.  Fig.  3.  Starting 
position  for  elementary  diving. 


116  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

(2)  Practice  the  above  spring  board  drill,  and  after  two  or  three  jumps 
let  the  board  lift  the  body  into  the  air.  Hold  the  swan  position  on  leaving 
the  board  ;  then  enter  the  water  correctly. 

Fourth  Step — Analysis  of  the  Step  and  Take-Off. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Body  erect,  ai-ms  at  the  side,  left  or  right  foot  forward.. 

Take  one  short  quick  running  steo  towards  the  end  of  the  ]>oard  ;  then 
spring  from  the  ball  of  the  forward  foot,  and  at  the  same  time,  lift  the 
body  as  high  as  possible  by  means  of  the  forward  upward  arm.  swing. 
Descend  to  the  board  from  the  spring  and  rebound  from  the  balls  of  both 
feet.  Hold  the  swan  position  upon  leaving  the  board,  then  enter  the  water 
correctly. 

Fifth  Step — Analysis  of  the  Run  and  Take-Off. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Before  attempting  the  swan  dive  measure  the  distance  by  taking  four 
short  running  steps  forward.  Execute  the  last  step  quickly  and  with  a 
forcible  spring  and  arm  swing.  The  final  springs  should  be  taken  near  the 
end  of  the  board,  body  erect. 

Sixth  Step — the  Running  Swan  Dive. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Assume  the  correct  standing  position  near  the  firm  end  of  the  board. 

Take  three  or  four  short  easy  running  steps  of  equal  distance.  On  the 
last  step  forcibly  jump  up,  leaping  from  the  ball  of  one  foot,  and  straighten 
the  flexed  knee.  At  the  same  time  lift  the  body  as  high  as  possible  by  the 
forcible  wide  upward  arm  swing.  Descend  to  the  board  from  the  spring, 
knees  straight,  and  rebound  from  the  balls  of  both  feet.  If  executed  cor- 
rectly the  spring  of  the  board  will  carry  the  body  high  into  the  air.  A 
correct  dive  requires  height  and  absolute  control  of  the  body  while  in 
the  air.  Keep  the  extended  legs  together,  toes  pointed,  arms  to  the  side 
in  the  swan  position.  Then  enter  the  water  at  an  angle  of  about  seventy- 
five  degrees,  head  down,  arms  extended,  thumbs  locked.     Fig.  2.  Page  117. 

Back  Dive 

First  Step — Back  Dive. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand  with  the  heels  over  the  edge  of  the  board  or  platform;  body 
erect,  arms  front  horizontal,  shoulder  width  apart.  Adjust  balance,  then 
raise  the  arms  to  the  vertical  position,  covering  ears,  thumbs  locked. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


117 


Advanced     Diving.     Fig.     1.     Working    the    board.      Fig.    2.     Swan 
dive.     Fig.   3.     Back-dive.     Fig.   4.     Jack-knife   dive. 


118  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

Inhale ! 

Dive — In ! 

Execute  the  first  position  by  bending  the  head  back  and  arching  the 
body;  hold  this  position  until  the  body  enters  the  water  and  is  submerged; 
then  come  to  surface. 

Second  Step^Back  Dive. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

This  is  the  same  as  described  in  the  first  position  in  the  back  dive. 

Inhale ! 

Dive — In ! 

Execute  the  second  position  by  first  springing  up.  then  arch  the  body 
and  enter  the  water  correctly. 

Third  Step — Back  Dive. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand  with  the  heels  over  the  edge  of  the  board,  body  erect,  arms  front 
horizontal. 

Inhale ! 

Dive — In ! 

Rise  on  the  toes  ;  bend  the  knees  and  forcibly  swing  the  arms  down  to 
the  side  of  the  body;  then  quickly  and  forcibly  straighten  the  knees  and 
swing  the  arms  up  to  vertical  position.  Quickly  execute  the  arm  swing 
and  upward  spring  as  one  continuous  motion.  After  gaining  height  from 
the  spring,  arch  the  body  backward  and  enter  the  water  correctly.  Fig.  3. 
Page  117. 

Front- Jack-Knife-Dive 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Assume  the  correct  starting  position  on  the  board  as  described  in  the 
sixth  step  of  the  swan  dive. 

In  executing  the  front-jack-knife  dive  work  the  board  correctly  as  de- 
scribed for  the  swan  dive.  Jump  with  the  body  erect,  obtaining  the  maxi- 
mum amount  of  height,  then  quickly  bend  the  body  forward  at  the  waist, 
touching  the  ankles,  legs  straight,  toes  pointed.  Hold  the  jack-knife  posi- 
tion for  a  moment,  then  straighten  the  body  and  enter  the  water  correctly. 
Fig.  4.  Page  117. 

Back- Jack-Knife-Dive 
First  Step — -Learning  the  Backward  Spring. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Stand  with  the  body  erect,  heels  over  the  edge  of  the  board,  arms  front 
horizontal,  shoulder  width  apart,  and  adjust  balance.     Forcibly  swing  the 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  119 

arms  and  at  the  same  time  spring  well  u])  and  hack,  clearing  the  hoard  at 
least  three  feet,     loiter  the  water  feet  first. 

The  novice  should  not  attemj.t  the  second  step  until  he  is  ahle  to  jump 
at  least  three  feet  hackward,  as  this  is  necessary  in  avoiding  a  collision 
with  the  board. 

Sfxond   Step — Analysis   of  the  Back-Jack-Knife. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

The  starting  position  is  tlie  same  as  described  in  the  first  step  of  the 
jack-knife-dive. 

Swing  the  arms,  at  the  same  time  quickly  and  forcibly  spring  up  and 
back,  gaining  sutificient  momentum  to  clear  the  board.  Immediately  after 
obtaining  the  backward  spring,  bend  tlie  body  forward  at  the  waist,  then 
quickly  straighten  the  body  and  enter  the  water  correctly. 

Third  Step — the  Back-Jack-Knife. 

Starting  position— Take ! 

The  starting  position  is  the  same  as  described  in  the  first  step  of  a  jack- 
knife-dive. 

After  attaining  balance  jump  well  up  and  out,  bend  the  body  forward 
touching  the  ankles,  hold  this  position  for  a  moment,  straighten  the  body 
and  enter  the  water  correctly.  Remember  that  the  forcible  arm  swing 
and  spring  upward  are  essential  for  this  dive. 

Platform  Diving 

The  principles  of  platform  diving  are  similar  to  spring-board  diving 
except  the  diver's  height  is  dependent  upon  his  arm  swing  and  spring. 
Before  attempting  high  diving  obtain  correct  form  from  the  five  or  ten 
foot  platform.  The  following  points  are  necessary  for  a  correct  dive : 
(1)  Start  with  the  body  erect.  (2)  Obtain  the  maximum  height.  (3) 
Hold  the  body  in  correct  form  while  in  the  air.  (4)  Enter  the  water  with 
the  body  extended,  thumbs  locked,  head  down.  The  angle  of  entry  should 
be  about  seventy-five  degrees. 

DON'T 

Don't  attempt  to  dive  without  first  taking  a  deep  breath. 

Don't  attemi)t  to  dive  without  lirst  assuming  correct  standing 
position. 

Don't  forget  that  a  forcible  arm  swing  and  spring  is  necessar.>  in 
gaining  height. 


120  suIa'mixg  simplified 

Don't  fall  forward,  but  spring  up  and  out. 

Don't  flex  the  knees  or  ankles,  or  separate  the  legs  while  in  the  air. 

Don't  attempt  to  enter  the  water  without  tirst  covering  the  lozvcrrd 
head  with  the  extended  arms,  thumbs  locked. 

Don't  attempt  to  rise  to  the  surface  until  the  body  is  submerged,  as 
one  is  likely  to  injure  the  back. 

Don't  attempt  to  rise  to  the  surface  by  just  turning  the  hands  up, 
but  bend  the  head  back  and  raise  the  shoulders. 

Don't  attempt  a  deep  dive  in  unknown  waters,  but  jump  feet  first. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  121 

VI 
LIFE-SAVING 

How  needless  is  the  yearly  death  loll  due  to  drowning.  And  yet,  did 
it  ever  occur  to  you  that  you  are  responsible?  That  is,  you  are  responsible 
if  ignorant  of  the  fundamental  principles  of  swimming  and  life-saving.  If 
you  have  ever  witnessed  the  frenzied  struggle  of  a  drowning  victim, 
although  unable  to  ofifer  assistance,  you  could  not  help  but  feel  your  guilt. 
The  majority  of  drownings  occur  either  because  of  ignorance  on  the  part 
of  the  victim  or  the  rescuer. 

The  term  education  should  not  apply  to  any  one  who  has  not  mastered 
the  rudiments  of  swimming  and  life-saving.  To  learn  to  swim  is  a  splen- 
did and  necessary  part  of  one's  education,  but  the  final  objective  should  be 
also  a  thorough  knowledge  of  life-saving,  for  one  never  knows  when  he 
may  be  called  upon  to  save  the  life  of  another. 

The  reason  we  hear  of  a  person  drowning  in  the  presence  pf  accom- 
plished swimmers  is  due  to  the  lack  of  knowledge  in  life-saving  and  the 
fear  of  the  so-called  "death-grip."  In  reality  the  "death-grip"  is  only  the 
misused  phrase  of  the  uninformed.  If  the  rescuer  is  familiar  with  the 
various  release  and  rescue  methods,  all  fear  is  needless ;  however,  it  is 
best  to  approach  the  struggling  victim  from  the  rear.  The  drowning 
person,  when  struggling  for  his  life,  frantically  clutches  anything,  but  as 
soon  as  the  victim  is  given  air,  and  feels  he  is  being  carried  to  safety  all 
struggles  will  cease. 

We  also  hear  of  a  "good  swimmer"  being  drowned,  but  this  is  usually 
due  to  the  following:  (1)  heart  failure,  (2)  foolishly  venturing  beyond 
one's  distance,  and  having  insufficient  energy  to  return,  (3)  encountering 
dangerous  tide  conditions,  (4)  swimming  immediately  after  a  hearty  meal, 
(5)  being  seized  with  a  cramp  and  becoming  excited. 

Not  only  is  individual  instruction  in  swimming  and  in  life-saving  neces- 
sary, but  as  a  means  of  more  effectively  fortifying  all  bathing  places,  the 
complete  and  proper  equipment  should  be  installed.  It  is  necessary  to  have 
stationed  at  regular  intervals,  posts  with  revolving  reels,  with  at  least  five 
hundred  yards  of  rope  securely  fastened  to  a  life-buoy.  If  possible  there 
should  be  one  or  more  fully  equipped  motor  or  row  boats  for  life-saving. 
A  catamorand  is  also  very  useful. 

George  Douglas  Freeth,  one  of  the  world's  greatest  life-savers,  leader 
and  teacher  of  swimming,  diving,  life-saving,  and  aquatic  sports,  con- 
tributed one  of  the  most  valuable  motor-driven  life-saving  apparatus.  His 
invention  consisted  of  a  three-wheeled  motorcycle  with  a  revolving  wheel 
containing  sixteen  hundred  feet  of  cable  wire  attached  to  an  air  tank,  used 


122  SJJ^IMMIXG  SI  MP  LI  PI  ED 

for  rescue  purposes,  also  a  six-foot  box  carrying  complete  life-saving 
equipment,  the  cover  of  which  could  be  used  for  resuscitating  purposes. 
Fig.  2.  Page  143. 

METHOD  OF  PROCEDURE  FOR  ACTUAL  RESCUE 

The  following  suggestions  serve  as  a  practical  application  of  the  land 
drills  given  in  the  text,  and  also  emphasize  the  important  steps  which  occur 
in  an  actual  rescue. 

1.  The  Danger  Signal  of  One  in  Distress. 

( 1  )    Tlie  victim  frantically  raising  the  arms. 

(2)  Body  disappearing  and  reappearing  for  one  or  more  times,  depend- 
ing upon  the  amount  of  air  in  the  lungs. 

(3)  Body  floating  face  down. 

(4)  Boat  or  canoe  capsized. 

2.  To  the  Rescue. 

(1)  Quickly  l)ut  calmly  determine  the  best  method  of  rescue  and  act 
accordingly. 

(2)  Quickly  remove  shoes  and  heavy  outer  clothing. 

(3)  When  rescue  necessitates  diving  into  unknown  waters  jump  feet 
first,  or  in  a  sitting  position. 

(4)  If  possible  when  attempting  rough  water  or  long  distance  rescue 
use  the  life-boat  equipped  with  life-buoys,  lines,  oars,  and  anchor. 
Rememxber  to  point  the  bow  towards  the  waves  while  launching 
the  boat  and  if  possible  while  going  to  the  rescue.  When  nearing 
the  victim  throw  out  line  and  buoy  or  grasp  him.  Then  lift  the 
body  over  the  stern,  never  over  the  side.  If  the  body  has  dis- 
appeared, dive  from  the  stern  and  recover  body  as  quickly  as 
possible. 

(5)  If  a  life-boat  is  not  available  when  attempting  rough  water  or 
distance  rescue,  it  is  best  to  use  life-buoy  and  line  regulated  by  an 
assistant  on  shore.  However,  if  this  is  not  available  use  any  object 
which  will  keep  the  body  afloat ;  as  an  inflated  automobile  tube,  etc. 

(6)  If  none  of  the  above  resources  are  at  hand  swim  with  a  long 
steady  stroke,  conserving  as  much  energy  as  possible  for  returning 
with  the  rescue. 

(7)  Where  one  has  to  contend  witli  currents,  if  possible  first  signal  for 
assistance.  Then  map  out  the  best  course,  taking  advantage  of  the 
tide,  and  avoid  "bucking"  the  current. 


SWIMMING  SIMPIJPIED 


123 


Life-Saving  Release  Methods— Land  Drills.  Fig.  1.  Wrist  grasp.  Fig. 
2.  Break.  Fig.  3.  The  body  turn  and  hold  after  release.  Fig  4,  Front  neck 
grasp.     Fig  5.  Break. 


124  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

(8)  If  the  victim-  has  disappeared,  keep  an  eye  on  the  spot  where  last 
seen.  If  the  place  of  drowning  is  not  known,  look  for  bubbles ;  in 
calm  water  they  will  rise  perpendicularly,  in  running  water  diagon- 
ally down  the  stream. 

3.  The  Rescue. 

( 1 )  For  an  ice  rescue,  place  silk  or  wool  over  the  ice,  as  it  adheres 
and  assists  one  in  climbing  out.  If  the  ice  is  thin,  spread  out  as 
much  as  possible,  distributing  body  weight,  and  crawl  over  the  ice. 

(2)  In  muddy  water,  repeated  surface  dives  are  necessary.  Bear  in 
mind  or  mark  the  section  which  has  been  thoroughly  explored. 

(3)  If  the  drowning  person  is  out  of  sight,  execute  a  surface  dive, 
swimming  with  a  breast  or  side  stroke  under  water,  head  held 
down.  When  the  body  is  located  take  hold  of  the  hair  or  suit 
with  one  hand.  Then  push  ofif  the  bottom  if  firm,  if  muddy  swim 
to  the  surface.  Rescuer  should  not  remain  under  water  too  long 
at  a  time  during  the  surface  dive,  as  it  is  very  fatiguing  and  one 
must  conserve  energy  for  the  return. 

(4)  If  possible,  approach  the  struggling  person  from  the  rear,  but  one 
must  be  able  to  break  the  hold  from  any  position. 

(5)  The  Grapple.  When  nearing  the  victim  who  is  about  to  frantically 
grasp  you  from  the  front,  first  take  a  deep  inhalation;  then  pro- 
tect yourself  by  either  extending  the  flexed  legs  against  the  vic- 
tim's chest  or  quickly  force  the  struggling  person  back  by  gripping 
the  victim's  mouth  and  chin  firmly  with  the  hand,  thumb  and  fore- 
finger holding  nose ;  then  place  the  right  knee  against  the  victim's 
abdomen ;  quickly  extend  the  arm  and  knee,  thereby  freeing  your- 
self, or  quickly  grasp  the  victim's  wrist,  twisting  the  arm  down, 
thereby  turning  his  body  away  from  you.  Be  alert  to  the  situation 
and  do  not  permit  the  drowning  person  to  take  advantage  of  you, 
thus  placing  yourself  in  a  precarious  position. 

(6)  The  ]Vrist  Break.  If  grasped  by  the  wrist  while  attempting  to 
rescue  victim,  first  take  a  deep  inhalation,  then  quickly  and  forcibly 
swing  the  arms  down  and  out,  applying  force  against  the  victim's 
thumbs.  Figs.  1  and  ZPage  123.  Fig.  1.  Page  129.  Or  if  grasped  with 
the  victim's  thumbs  on  the  outside,  force  up  and  out.  Immediately 
after  the  break,  grasp  the  victim's  wrist,  right  hand  to  right  or 
left  hand  to  left,  turning  the  victim  away  from  you.  Fig.  3.  Page 
123 ;  Fig.  4.  Page  135.  Then  assume  correct  carry  position.  It  is 
necessary  for  the  rescuer  to  grasp  the  wrist  immediately  after  each 
break,  in  order  to  protect  himself  from  further  attacks  and  also  to 
maintain  hold  of  the  drowning  person  throughout. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  125 

(7)  The  Front  Neck  Break.  If  grasped  about  the  neck,  while  attempt- 
ing rescue  from  the  front,  inhale,  then  firmly  grip  the  victim's  arms 
by  placing  the  palms  of  hands  under  the  elbows.  Break  the  front 
neck  grasp  by  quickly  and  forcibly  raising  the  victim's  arms  over 
his  head,  and  immediately  swinging  them  over  and  down  to  the 
right  side  (or  left  side).  Quickly  grasp  the  victim's  wrist  and 
turn  body  away  from  you.  Immediately  assume  carry  position. 
Refer  to  text  for  other  break  methods  for  the  front  neck  hold. 
Figs.  4  and  5.  Page  123;  Fig.  2.  Page  129. 

(8)  The  Body  Break.  If  grasped  about  the  body  while  attempting  a 
rescue  from  the  fron.t  apply  the  same  method  used  for  the  front 
neck  hold,  or  break  the  grasp  by  forcing  up  with  one  hand  and 
extending  the  knee  against  the  victim's  abdomen.  Then  quickly 
grasp  the  victim's  wrist,  turn  the  body  away  and  assume  the  cor- 
rect carry  position.  Figs.  1  and  2.  Page  127;  Fig.  2,  Page  129; 
Fig.  5.   Page   135. 

(9)  Rear  Neck  Break.  If  grasped  about  the  body  or  neck  from  the 
rear  while  attempting  a  rescue,  take  a  deep  inhalation,  then  quickly 
turn  the  thumbs  back,  or  separate  the  victim's  arms.  At  the  same 
time  the  rescuer  should  quickl}^  force  his  hips  against  the  victim's, 
then  duck  down  and  out  to  the  side,  maintaining  hold  of  one  of  the 
victim's  wrists,  then  quickly  turn  body  in  position  for  carry.  Figs. 
4  and  5.  Page  127;  Fig.  3.  Page  129. 


4.   Returning  With  Rescued. 

After  the  break  and  body  turn  it  is  necessary  for  one  to  use  the  correct 
carry  method  with  a  struggling  person  or  one  not  struggling.  Remember 
to  keep  the  victim's  body  in  a  horizontal  position  during  the  carry  and  the 
mouth  raised  sufficiently  to  clear  the  water  surface. 

(1)  The  Side  Head  Carry  for  a  StruggVing  J^ictim.  The  side  head 
carry  is  the  best  way  to  rescue  a  struggling  person.  The  rescuer 
places  the  palm  of  the  left  hand  on  the  victim's  chin,  with  the 
fingers  gripping  the  lower  jaw,  the  arms  slightly  flexed.  Place  the 
victim's  body  over  the  left  hip,  swim  with  an  under  arm  side  stroke. 
(If  a  person  swims  on  the  left  side  the  reverse  would  apply.)  If 
the  victim  attempts  to  clutch  you  during  the  carry,  submerge  his 
face,  tightening  the  grip  for  a  few  seconds  or  until  struggling  has 
ceased.  Then  assume  correct  carry  position  and  continue  swim- 
ming.    Fig.  3.  Page  133. 


126  Sir IM MING  SIMPLIFIED 

(2)  The  Side  Chest  Carry  for  a  Struggling  Person.  The  side  chest 
carry  may  also  be  used  for  a  struggling  victim.  For  complete  de- 
scription refer  to  the  text.     Fig.  2.   Page   133. 

(3)  Head  or  I'nder  Ami  Carry,  zcJien  Victim  is  not  Struggling.  When 
the  victim  is  not  struggling  use  the  head  or  under  arm  carry 
methods,  as  described  in  the  land  drills.  Fig.  5.  Page  129;  Fig.  1. 
Page   133. 

(4)  Cramp  or  Fatigued  Person  Carry.  When  one  is  temporarily  handi- 
capped or  fatigued,  carry  to  safety  by  the  fifth  rescue  method  as 
described  in  the  text.     Fig.  4.   Page  129. 

(5)  Remember  to  swim  Vvith  a  long  steady  stroke,  conserving  energy. 

(6)  Upon  reaching  the  shore,  if  the  victim  is  heavy  call  for  aid;  how- 
ever, if  assistance  cannot  be  had,  drag  the  victim  out  of  the  water 
or  roll  the  body  to  a  point  of  safety. 

(7)  If  the  victim  is  not  too  heavy,  and  while  in  the  water,  place  him 
over  the  lower  part  of  the  back,  one  arm  holding  the  victim's  arm, 
the  other  gripping  his  leg.  Do  not  carry  the  victim  for  a  long 
distance  but  begin  resuscitation  at  once,  as  a  few  minutes  may 
mean  the  loss  of  a  life.     Fig.  3.  Page  127. 

5.  Safety  First  Measures  in  Resuscitat'on. 

(1)  Immediately  summon  medical  aid. 

(2)  Remember  that  the  individual  having  a  knowledge  of  life-saving 
and  resuscitation  should  be  given  preference,  regardless  of  age  or 
sex.  Often  a  life  has  been  lost  through  the  interference  of  those 
armed  with  authority  but  lacking  in  knov^^ledge. 

(3)  Place  the  extended  body  face  down,  head  resting  on  the  arm  as  in 
the  Schafer  Method. 

(4)  Remove  tight  clothing  so  that  it  will  not  interfere  with  breathing. 

(5)  Remember  how,  when,  and  where  to  exert  pressure  and  release. 
Figs.  4  and  5.  Page  133. 

(6)  While  resuscitating,  apply  heat  to  the  feet,  and  if  possible  cover 
the  victim  with  blankets. 

(7)  Remember  that  the  apparently  drowned  have  been  revived  after 
being  under  water  as  long  as  thirty  minutes.  Work  incessantly  for 
at  least  three  hours.  Time  and  energy  is  not  to  be  considered  when 
it  means  the  recovery  of  life. 

(8)  After  normal  respiration  has  been  established  the  following  pre- 
cautions are  necessary:  (a)  aid  the  circulation  by  rubbing  the  arms 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


127 


■  Life-Saving  Release  Methods— Land  Drills.     Fig.  1.  Body  grasp.     Fig. 
2.  Break.    Fig.  3.  Land  carry.     Fig.  4.  Rear  neck  grasp.    Fig.  5.  Break. 


128  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

and  legs  toward  the  heart,    (b)    Remove  wet  clothing,  place  well 
covered  hot  water  bottles  or  hot  stones  under  the  arm  pits,  or  at 
the  soles  of  the  feet,  and  a  heated  flannel  across  the  abdomen. 
(9)   Do  not  give  large  doses  of  stimulants,  a  teaspoonful  at  a  time  is 
best,  and  then  only  after  normal  respiration  has  been  established. 

(10)  Keep  the  victim  in  a  quiet,  well  ventilated  room,  watch  for  any 
signs  of  relapse. 

(11)  Other  methods  of  resuscitation  are  the  Silvester,  Howard,  and 
Marshall  Hall.  The  Schafer  and  Sheffield  methods  are  superior 
to  others,  first,  because  of  their  simplicity;  second,  they  necessitate 
only  one  individual  to  resuscitate  and  require  the  least  expenditure 
of  energy;  third,  because  of  the  prone  position,  the  tongue  natur- 
ally falls  forward ;  fourth,  this  method  approximates  natural 
breathing,  filling  the  lungs  with  a  greater  amount  of  air  than  in 
normal  respiration.  The  resuscitation  methods  are  not  only  effect- 
ive for  restoring  the  apparently  drowned,  but  can  be  used  in  cases 
of  smoke  suffocation,  gas  or  electric  shock. 


PRELIMINARY  LIFE-SAVING  DRILLS 

The  object  of  these  preliminary  drills  is  to  instruct  one  in  the  necessary 
steps  in  life-saving. 

1.  Plain  Diving. 

(1)  Execute  a  racing  or  shallow  dive  correctly. 

(2)  Execute  a  plain  dive  or  jump  feet  first  from  a  five  or  ten-foot  plat- 
form. When  a  rescue  in  unknown  waters  necessitates  diving,  jump 
feet  first. 

2.  Swimming  With  Clothes  On. 

It  is  necessary  to  remove  the  heavy  outer  clothing  before  attempting  a 
rescue ;  as  shoes,  coat,  trousers  or  skirt. 

However,  one  may  be  called  upon  to  remove  clothing  while  in  the  water 
as  the  result  of  a  boat  or  canoe  capsizing. 

(1)  Swim  twenty-five  yards  dressed,  wearing  apparel  consisting  of 
waist  or  coat,  trousers  or  skirts,  and  shoes. 

(2)  Undress  while  in  deep  water,  approximate  the  true  floating  posi- 
tion, keeping  the  body  submerged  as  much  as  possible ;  first  re- 
move the  shoes,  then  coat  or  waist,  trousers  or  skirt,  then  continue 
swimming   for  fifty  yards  without  stopping. 


SJriMMixc;  siMPLiPinn 


129 


{ 


►.**^£*J 


Life-Saving  Release  and  Rescue  Methods— Water  Drills.  Fig.  1. 
Wrist  Break.  Fig.  2  Front  neck  break.  Fig.  3.  Rear  neck  break. 
Fig.  4.     Cramp  or  fatigued  persons  carry.     Fig.  5.      Head  carr\\ 


130  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

3.  Surface  Diving  and  Bringing  Up  Object. 

It  is  necessary  for  one  to  execute  a  surface  dive  in  order  to  bring  up  an 
object  or  body. 

(1)  While  treading  water,  inhale;  then  forcibly  duck  the  head  down 
and  under,  at  the  same  time  bend  sharply  at  the  waist;  now 
forcibly  "kick  up  the  legs."  This  weight  over  the  head  tends  to 
drive  the  body  down. 

(2)  In  order  to  continue  the  downward  course,  swim  the  breast  or  side 
stroke,  keeping  the  head  down. 

(3)  While  on  the  bottom,  grasp  the  six-pound  weight;  place  it  on  the 
hip  ;  push  off  from  the  bottom  or  swim  to  surface,  being  careful  to 
hold  the  weight  on  the  hip  while  swimming  to  the  edge  of  the  pool. 

In  an  actual  rescue,  if  the  position  of  the  body  is  not  known,  look  for 
bubbles.  In  still  water  they  will  rise  perpendicularly,  in  running  water 
diagonally. 

Execute  a  surface  dive  for  the  body.  When  found,  grasp  the  hair  or 
suit.  If  the  bottom  is  firm,  push  off;  but  if  it  is  soft  and  muddy  swim  to 
surface  with  a  forcible  leg  kick  and  arm  pull.  Then  use  the  correct  carry 
method. 

4.  Strokes  Necessary  for  Rescue  Work. 

(1)  If  possible  practice  motionless  floating  for  one  minute,  but  if  body 
displacement  is  heavier  than  the  water,  use  a  sculling  arm  motion 
or  crawl-kick. 

(2)  Practice  treading  water  for  at  least  three  minutes.  One  may  also 
use  a  sculling  arm  motion. 

(3)  Swim  twenty-five  yards  on  the  back,  using  the  elementary  back 
stroke,  legs  alone,  arms  extended,  hands  held  above  water  surface 
as  though  towing  an  object. 

(4)  Swim  twenty-five  yards  on  the  back,  using  a  modified  scissor-kick, 
arms  extended,  hands  held  in  carry  position. 

(5)  Swim  twenty-five  yards,  with  the  under-arm-side  stroke,  using  the 
scissor  kick  and  the  right  arm;  the  left  arm  held  in  carry  position. 

(6)  Swim  fifty  yards,  breast,  trudgeon,  or  crawl,  pretending  that  you 
are  pushing  the  helpless  one  in  front  or  you. 

THE  BREAK  AND  CARRY  METHODS 

The  purpose  of  a  break  is  to  effectively  release  one's  self  from  the 
grasp  of  a  drowning  victim.  After  the  release,  a  correct  carry  is  essential 
to  bring  the  drowning  person  to  a  point  of  safety. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  131 

It  is  not  necessary  to  use  each  particular  carry  with  the  release  method 
given.  Circumstances  may  not  warrant  this  usage.  For  example,  after 
breaking  the  wrist  grasp,  the  carry  method  to  be  used  would  depend  upon 
the  drowning  victim;  if  one  violently  struggles,  use  the  side  head  carry;  if 
subdued  and  calm,  use  the  head  or  other  carry  methods  listed.  The  reason 
for  combining  the  rescue  with  the  release  drills  is  that  it  approximates  the 
actual  rescue  featuring  the  most  important  break  and  carry  methods. 

LAND   DRILL. 

First  Break  or  Release  Method. 

The  starting  position  consists  of  the  following  commands:  Line-up! 
Both  lines  towards  each  other — Face  !  Arms  sideways — Raise  !  Arms — 
Position ! 

Line-up  ! 

At  the  command  Line-up !  form  according  to  height,  in  two  straight 
lines,  about  two  feet  apart. 

Both  lines  towards  each  other — Face ! 

Arms  sideways — Raise  ! 

At  the  command  Raise!,  adjust  distance  by  raising  the  arms  side-hori- 
zontal, palms  down. 

Arms — Position ! 

At  the  command  Position !  quickly  bring  the  arms  down  to  the  side  of 
the  body  and  assume  the  position  of  attention;  that  is,  the  best  possible 
standing  position,  heels  together,  toes  turned  out,  forming  an  angle  of 
about  thirty  degrees,  the  entire  body  erect,  weight  forward  on  the  balls 
of  the  feet,  knees  extended,  abdomen  in,  chest  high,  head  erect,  chin  in, 
extended  arms  and  hands  at  the  side  of  the  body. 

Important  Note.— Each  member  of  the  first  line  will  act  as  the  rescuer, 
or  number  one ;  each  member  of  the  second  line  will  act  as  the  drowning 
person,  or  number  two.  At  the  end  of  the  drill,  reverse  the  order,  number 
one  acting  as  the  drowning  victim,  number  two,  as  the  rescuer. 

Wrists — Grasp ! 

At  the  command  Grasp !  number  one  raises  the  partially  flexed  arms, 
while  number  two  firmly  clasps  number  one  by  the  wrist,  with  the  thumbs 
in.     Fig.  1.  Page  123;  Fig.  1.  Page  135. 

Break ! 

At  the  command  Break !  number  one  forcibly  brings  the  arms  down  in 
front  of  the  body,  and  continues  the  forcible  arm  swing  to  the  side,  break- 
ing the  grasp  by  applying  force  against  number  two's  thumbs.  Fig.  2. 
Page  123;  Fig.  1.  Page  129.  . 

Body — Turn ! 


132  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

At  the  command  Turn  !  number  one  grasps  number  two's  wrist,  right 
hand  to  right,  and  quickly  turns  number  two's  body  away  from  him,  then 
assumes  the  correct  carry  position.  Fig.  3.  Page  123;  Fig.  4.  Page  135. 
The  object  of  grasping  the  wrist  after  the  break  is  to  protect  one's  self 
from  further  attacks,  and  also  to  maintain  hold  of  the  drowning  person 
throughout. 

Important  Note. — Practice  the  above  drill  by  using  the  wrist  grasp, 
thumbs  out,  and  break  the  grasp  by  forcibly  bringing  the  arms  up  and  out, 
applying  force  against  number  two's  thumbs. 

First;  Carry  or  Rescue  Method. 

Position  for  head  carry — Take  ! 

At  the  command  Take!  place  palms  of  hands  over  number  two's  ears, 
fingers  resting  on  lower  jaw,  raising  mouth  sufficiently  to  clear  the  imagin- 
ary water  surface.     Fig.  1.  Page  139;  Fig.  5.  Page  129. 

Position  ! 

At  the  command  Position  !  assume  the  best  possible  standing  position. 

Number  twos  about — Face  ! 

At  the  command  Face!  turn  on  the  heel  of  the  right  foot  and  the  toe  of 
the  left,  finishing  with  both  heels  together,  and  facing  number  one. 

Second  Break  or  Release  Method. 

Starting  position — Take  ! 

Both  lines  face  towards  each  other,  properly  spaced  as  described  in 
the  starting  position  of  the  first  release  method. 

From  the  front,  neck — Grasp  ! 

At  the  command  Grasp !  number  two  grasps  number  one  about  the 
neck,  fingers  tightly  clasped,  arms  extended.     Fig.  4,   Page  123. 

Break  position- — Take  ! 

At  the  command  Take !  number  one  firmly  grips  number  two's  arms, 
palms  of  hands  supporting  elbows.     Fig.  4,   Page   123. 

Break! 

At  the  command  Break  !  number  one  quickly  and  forcibly  breaks  the 
neck  grasp  by  raising  number  two's  arms  above  his  head  and  forcibly 
swinging  them  down  to  the  righ  side.  Fig.  5.  Page  123;  Fig.  2.  Page  135. 
Immediately  number  one  grasps  number  two's  right  wrist,  turns  victim 
away  from  him,  and  assumes  correct  carry  position. 

Important  Note. — The  neck  break  may  be  also  executed  by  the  follow- 
ing methods  : 

(1)  With  the  right  hand  gripping  the  victim's  chin,  thumb  and  fore- 
finger holding  the   nose,   the   left  hand   gripping  the   elbow,   quickly  and 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


133 


Life-Saving-Rescue  and  Resuscitation  Methods.  Fig.  1.  Under 
arm  carry.  Fig.  2.  Chest  carry.  Fig.  3.  Side  head  carry.  Figs.  4  and  5. 
Schiifer  method  resuscitation. 


134  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

forcibly  extend  the  right  arm  against  the  victim's  chin,  at  the  same  time 
force  the  left  arm  up,  maintaining  hold  of  the  victim's  right  arm;  turn 
body  in  position  for  the  carry. 

(2)  Place  both  hands  on  the  victim's  chest;  quickly  and  forcibly  ex- 
tend the  arms,  thereby  forcing  yourself  downward;  maintain  hold  of  one 
arm  after  the  release ;  then  quickly  turn  the  body  in  position  for  the  carry. 

Second  Carry  or  Rescue  Method. 

Position  for  under  arm  carry — Take ! 

At  the  command  Take !  number  one  grips  number  two's  upper  arms, 
placing  palms  of  hands  near  the  arm  pits.  Fig.  2.  Page  139;  Fig.  1. 
Page  133. 

Position ! 

Number  twos  about — Face  ! 

Third  Break  or  Release  Method. 

The  starting  position  is  the  same  as  described  in  the  preceding  drills. 

Body — Grasp  ! 

At  the  command  Grasp !  number  two  grasps  number  one  around  the 
body,  taking  care  to  bring  his  arms  over  those  of  number  one,  interlacing 
the  hands  at  the  rear.     Fig.  1.  Page  127. 

Break  position — Take  ! 

At  the  command  Take !  number  one  firmly  grips  number  two's  arms, 
palms  of  hands  supporting  elbows.     Fig.  1.  Page  127. 

Break! 

At  the  command  Break !  number  one  quickly  and  forcibly  breaks  the 
body  grasp  by  raising  number  two's  arms  above  his  head  and  forcibly 
swinging  them  down  to  the  right  side.  Fig.  2.  Page  127;  Fig.  5.  Page  135; 
Fig.  2.  Page  129.  Then  immediately  number  one  grasps  number  two's 
right  wrists,  turns  body  away  from  him,  then  places  victim's  body  in  posi- 
tion for  carry. 

Important  Note. — Another  method  of  executing  the  body  break  is  as 
follows  :  Grip  victim's  chin  with  right  hand,  thumb  and  forefinger  holding 
nose,  left  hand  on  shoulder,  right  knee  against  victim's  abdomen.  Break 
the  grasp  by  forcibly  extending  the  right  arm  and  knee;  maintain  hold  of 
one  arm  after  the  break  and  quickly  turn  body  in  position  for  carry.  Fig. 
5,   Page  135. 

Third  Carry  or  Rescue  Method. 

Position  for  side  head  carry — Take  ! 

At  the  command  Take!  number  one  places  the  palm  of  his  left  hand  on 
the  victim's  chin,  with  the  fingers  gripping  the   lower  jaw,   arm  partially 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


Life-Saving  Release  Methods-Land  Drills.  Fig.  L  Wrist  grasp. 
Fig  ^  Neck  grasp.  Fig.  3.  Side  Carry.  Fig.  4.  Body  turn  and 
hold  after  the  release.     Fig.  5.  Body  break.     Fig.  6.  Rear  neck  grasp. 


136  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

flexed,  body  well  over  the  hip  :  then  number  one  assumes  the  side  stroke 
swimming   position,    right   arm   extended.      Fig.   3.   Page    133. 

Position  ! 

Both  lines  about — Face  ! 

Fourth  Break  or  Release  Method. 

The  starting  position  is  as  follows  : 

Both  ;lmes!^f ace  in  the  same  direction,  number  twos  in  the  rear  line. 

From'>the  rear,  necki^Grasp ! 

At  the  comma^id'Gfdsp  !  number  two  grasps  number  one  about  the  neck, 
finishing  wtih  the^arms  across  number  one's  chest.     Fig.  4.   Page  127. 

Break  position — Take  ! 

At  the  command  Take !  number  one  grasps  number  two's  fingers  or 
wrists,  left  hand  grasping  left,  right  hand  grasping  right.  Fig.  4.  Page 
127:  Fig.  6.  Page   135. 

Break ! 

At  the  command  Break!  number  one  separates  number  two's  arms,  at 
the  same  time  quickly  forcing  back  with  the  hips  ;  then  ducks  down  and 
out  to  the  side  from  number  two's  grasp,  maintaining  hold  of  one  arm; 
then  quickly  turns  body  in  position  for  the  carry.  Fig.  5.  Page  127;  Fig. 
3.  Page  129. 

Important  Note. — If  it  is  extremely  difficult  to  separate  number  two's 
arms,  number  one  should  then  eff^ect  a  break  by  turning  the  fingers  back, 
then  immediately  grasp  number  two's  wrists,  in  order  to  protect  himself. 

If  the  drowning  victim  entwines  his  legs  around  the  rescuer's  body  or 
legs,  he  should  release  himself  by  bending  the  foot  or  toes  back. 

Fourth  Cany  or  Rescue  Method. 

Position  for  the  side  chest  carry — Take ! 

At  the  command  Take !  number  one  places  left  arm  over  number  two's 
left  shoulder  and  across  the  chesty,  finishing  with  the  hand  under  number 
two's  right  arm;  ^  the  same  tii^e  number  one  adjusts  num.ber  two's  body 
position  by  placing  his  hip  under  number  two's  body ;  then  number  one  as- 
sumes the  side  stroke  swimming  position,  right  arm  extended.  Fig.  2. 
Page  133. 

Position  ! 

Number  twos  about — Face  ! 

Fifth  Carry  or  Rescue  Method. 

This  carry  is  to  be  used  when  a  person  is  temporarily  handicapped  by 
a  cramp  or  greatly  fatigued,  although  maintaining  consciousness  and  pos- 
sessing self-control. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  137 

Position  for  front  carry — Take  ! 

At  the  command  Take !  number  two  places  both  hands  on  number  one's 
shoulders,  near  the  neck.  At  the  same  time  number  one  places  his  arms  in 
position  for  the  breast,  trugdeon  or  crawl  strokes ;  that  is,  front  horizontal 
on  the  outside  of  number  two's  extended  arms. 

Double  over-arm  motion — Begin  ! 

At  the  command  Begin !  number  one  takes  two  complete  over-arm 
strokes  as  described  in  the  swimming  land  drills.     Fig.  4,   Page  129. 

Position ! 


THE  BREAK  AND  CARRY  METHODS 

WATER   DRILL 

First  Break  or  Release  Method. 

The  starting  position  consists  of  the  following  commands: 

Line-up  !     Arms  sideways — Raise  !     Arms — Position  ! 

Line-up  ! 

At  the  command  Line-up  !  form  in  two  lines  according  to  height,  about 
the  deep  water  end  of  the  pool ;  number  two,  or  the  victim,  stands  with  toes 
over  the  edge;  number  one,  or  the  rescuer,  stands  directly  in  back  of 
number  two. 

Arms  sideways — Raise  ! 

At  the  command  Raise!  adjust  distance. 

Arms — Position  ! 

At  the  command  Position!  bring  the  arms  down  to  the  side  of  the  body, 
and  assume  the  correct  standing  position. 

Number  two  on  your  mark — Go  ! 

At  the  command  Go  !  number  two  enters  the  water,  using  a  shallow  or 
racing  dive.  Fig.  3.  Page  115,  then  swims  towards  the  center  of  the  pool  and 
turns  about  awaiting  the  arrival  of  number  one,  now  and  then  frantically 
raising  the  arms  above  the  head,  submerging  the  body,  as  though  drowning. 

Number  one  on  your  mark — Go  ! 

At  the  command  Go  !  number  one  enters  the  water  using  a  racing  or 
shallow  dive. 

1.  To  the  Rescue. 

(1)  Number  one  swims  to  the  rescue  of  number  two. 

(2)  The  Approach.     Upon  the  approach,  number  one  raises  the  arms 
preparatory  to  assisting  number  two. 


138  SWIM  AUNG  SIMPLIFIED 

2.  The  Rescue. 

(3)  The  Grapple.  As  number  one  attempts  to  assist,  number  two  grasps 
number  one's  wrist. 

(4)  The  Break.  Number  one  breaks  the  wrist  grasp  as  described  in 
the  land  drill. 

(5)  The -Hold  and  Body  Turn.  Then  number  one  maintains  hold  of 
number  two's  wrist,  turns  body  away  from  him,  and  assumes  the 
correct  carry  position.     Fig.  4.  Page  139. 

3.  Return  With  Rescued. 

(6)  TJie  Garry.  Assume  correct  position  for  the  head  carry  and  swim 
back  to  the  starting  place,  using  the  elementary  back  stroke,  or  a 

modified  scissor  kick.  While  carrying  the  victim,  remember  that 
the  body  must  be  in  a  horizontal  position,  mouth  raised  sufficiently 
to  clear  the  water  surface. 

(7)  Plaee  Body  Over  the  Edge  of  Pool.  Upon  reaching  the  side  of 
the  pool  number  one  places  number  two's  arms  and  the  upper  part 
of  the  body  over  the  edge  of  the  pool,  then  applies  force  against 
number  two's  bips  in  the  final  effort  of  getting  number  two's  body 
out  of  the  water.  Then  the  rescuer  quickly  climbs  out,  grasps 
number  two's  wrists  and  pulls  the  body  over  the  edge. 

Importaxt  Note. — Practice  the  second,  third,  and  fourth  release  and 
rescue  drills  in  tbe  water,  following  the  form  used  in  the  preceding  water 
drill.  Repeat  the  entire  drill,  number  ones  acting  as  the  drowning  persons, 
number  twos  the  rescuers. 

SCHAFER  METHOD   OF  RESUSCITATION 

Number  two's  body  in  position  for  resuscitation — Place! 

At  the  command  Place!  number  one  straightens  number  two's  body, 
then  places  number  two's  rigbt  arm  under  the  head  as  a  support,  turning 
the  head  to  the  left,  taking  care  to  have  the  mouth  low;  and  place  the 
partially  flexed  left  arm  above  the  head. 

Number  one,  position  for  the  resuscitation — Take  ! 

At  the  command  Take !  number  one  kneels  in  a  stride  position  over 
number  two's  thighs,  placing  the  palms  of  the  hands  on  the  small  of  the 
back,  thumbs  about  four  inches  apart,  fingers  separated  and  placed  over 
the  lowest  ribs.     Fig.  4.  Page  133;  Fig.  3.  Page  139. 

Press — One ! 

At  the  command  One  !  the  rescuer  or  resuscitator  leans  forward,  ex- 
erting pressure,  keeping  the  arms  extended.  This  position  should  be  held 
for  the  length  of  a  normal  exhalation,  about  two  seconds.    Fig.  5,  Page  133. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


139 


Life-Saving  Rescue  and  Resuscitation  Drills.  Fig.  1.  Head  carry. 
Fig.  2.  Under  arm  carry.  Fig.  3.  Schafer  method  of  resuscitation.  Fig.  4. 
Under  arm  carry. 


140  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

"The  abdomen  being  pressed  against  the  ground  forces  the  viscera  against 
the  diaphragm,  which  is  thereby  itself  moved  upward,  driving  air  out  of 
the  Kmgs." 

Release — Two ! 

At  the  command  Two  !  the  rescuer  leans  back  slightly,  quickly  releasing 
pressure,  while  keeping  the  hands  on  number  two's  body.  Fig.  4.  Page  133. 
The  positif)n  should  be  held  for  the  length  of  a  normal  inhalation. 
"When  the  pressure  is  released,  the  elasticity  of  the  parts  causes  them  to 
resume  their  former  shape  and  volume  and  air  is  drawn  in  through  the 
glottis." 

Counts  One !  and  Two !  constitute  one  complete  resuscitating  move- 
ment. Therefore  the  correct  timing  should  l)c  from  twelve  to  fifteen  com- 
plete movements  per  minute. 

In  practice  repeat  the  resuscitation  drill  for  about  two  minutes.  How- 
ever, in  case  of  an  actual  drowning,  this  drill  must  be  continued  until 
life  is  restored,  or  for  several  hours. 

Circulation — Increase ! 

At  the  command  Increase  !  number  one  vigorously  rubs  number  two's 
back,  legs,  and  arms,  taking  care  to  rub  towards  the  heart,  thus  acceler- 
ating the  circulation. 

Position ! 

At  the  command  Position !  both  lines  quickly  assume  a  correct  standing 
position.  Repeat  the  entire  drill,  number  one  acting  as  the  drowning  vic- 
tim, number  two  as  the  resuscitator. 

Refer  to  instructors"  note  on  life-saving,  page  167. 

We  are  grateful  to  our  father.  Dr.  Sheffield,  for  his  valuable  sugges- 
tions given  us  on  the  subject  of  life-saving.  He  helped  organize  and  acted 
as  surgeon  of  the  Wnice  Life-Saving  Corps.  He  has  also  taught  swim- 
ming and  life-saving  in  several  different  countries. 

DR.  SHEFFIELD'S  METHOD  OF  RESUSCITATION 

"First,  place  the  suft'ocated  person  on  the  ground  with  one  arm  under 
his  head  as  in  the  Schafer  Method.  Then  stand  astride  him.  Place  your 
elbows  between  your  knees,  thus  affording  greater  pressure  to  the  hands, 
which  should  grasp  the  middle  of  the  victim's  side,  thumbs  pointing  toward 
the  spine  and  fore  fingers  following  the  lower  ribs.  Force  down,  in,  and 
up  for  two  or  three  seconds.  Then  release  and  catch  under  the  patient's 
hip  joints.  Raise  the  body  so  that  the  ribs  can  swing  forward  for  one 
or  two  seconds.  Again  release  and  repeat  the  entire  process  from  ten  to 
twelve  times  per  minute. 

My  experience  has  proven  this  to  be  one  of  the  best  methods  for  restor- 
ing life." 


SU'IMMI-yO  SIMPLll'lliD 


\n  \ctiial  Rescue  Fig.  1-  The  alarm.  Fig.  2.  Lowering  the 
boai  F^g  1  To  the  rescue^  Fig.  4  and  5.  Dr.  Sheffield  illustrating  his 
method    of    resuscitation. 


142  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

DON'T 

Don't  get  excited,  because  calmness  of  mind  is  at  all  times  neces- 
sary, in  acurateiy  sizing  up  the  situation. 

Don't  attempt  rescue  without  first  removing  shoes  and  heavy  outer 
clothing,  because  this  would  hinder  progress  and  fatigue  the  rescuer. 

Don't  forget  to  keep  watch  of  the  victim  or  spot  where  last  seen,  as 
this  aids  in  rescue. 

Don't  forget  to  jump  feet  first  in  unknown  waters,  because  of  the 
possible  danger  of  diving  into  unknown  objects. 

Don't  approach  the  victim  with  a  fast  jerky  stroke,  as  this  is  ex- 
hausting and  energy  must  be  conserved  for  the  rescue. 

Don't  if  possible,  approach  victim  from  the  front,  because  the 
drowning  person  may  secure  an  unfavorable  grasp. 

Don't  attempt  rescue  without  some  knowledge  of  the  correct  break 
methods,  because  this  may  mean  two  lives  instead  of  one. 

Don't  attempt  release  by  "knock-out"  measures,  because  it  may 
prove  fatal  to  the  victim. 

Don't  lose  hold  of  victim  immediately  after  the  break  is  effected,  as 
the  victim  may  resume  the  struggle  or  disappear. 

Don't  attempt  to  bring  a  body  to  surface  by  pushing  off  the  bottom 
if  soft  and  muddy,  as  two  lives  may  be  imperilled. 

Don't  forget  to  employ  the  correct  carry  method,  because  this  is 
necessary  to  insure  the  safety  of  the  victim  and  rescuer. 

Don't  forget  to  keep  the  victim's  body  in  a  horizontal  position  dur- 
ing the  carry,  as  this  will  prevent  body  drag  and  aid  the  rescuer. 

Don't  carry  the  victim  in  such  a  way  as  to  interfere  with  breathing 
or  submerge  the  mouth,  as  this  may  prove  fatal. 

Don't  swim  with  a  quick  jerky  stroke  or  attempt  to  "buck"  the  cur- 
rent, as  this  may  prevent  the  rescue. 

Don't  forget  to  summon  medical  aid  at  once. 

Don't  lose  time  in  getting  the  victim  to  a  point  of  safety,  as  it  is 
necessary  to  begin  resuscitation  as  soon  as  possible,  a  few  minutes  may 
mean  the  loss  of  a  life. 

Don't  use  the  pulmotor,  as  it  has  proven  dangerous  in  the  hands  of 
the  inexperienced. 

Don't  attempt  resuscitation  without  first  unfastening  tight  clothing, 
as  this  aids  circulation  and  breathing. 

Don't  attempt  resuscitation  in  a  crowded  and  poorly  ventilated  place, 
as  the  victim  needs  all  the  fresh  air  possible. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


143 


Fig    1.    George    Freeth,    world's    champion    surf    board    rider.      Fig    2. 
George  Freeth  with  his  mile  a-minute  life-saving  apparatus. 


144  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

Don't  attempt  resuscitation  v/ithout  first  straightening  the  body, 
placing  the  head  and  arms  in  correct  position,  clearing  the  mouth,  as 
these  measures  are  essential  in  resuscitation. 

Don't  apply  pressure  more  than  fifteen  times  per  minute,  as  this  is 
dangerous. 

Don't  forget  to  apply  warmth  immediately,  as  this  is  necessary  in 
aiding  the  circulation. 

Don't  give  up  too  soon,  as  it  often  requires  from  two  to  four  hours 
of  resuscitation  to  restore  life. 

Don't  stop  artificial  respiration  when  the  victim  is  breathing  irregu- 
larly, as  a  relapse  may  follow. 

Don't  attempt  massage  by  rubbing  away  from  the  heart,  as  it  im- 
pedes circulation. 

Don't  give  stimulants  until  normal  respiration  is  established,  and 
then  only  a  teaspoonful  at  a  time,  otherwise  this  may  cause  choking. 

Don't  administer  large  doses  of  stimulants,  as  it  may  prove  harmful. 


SWIM  MI  \C  SIMPLIFIED  145 


VII 


THE  SAFETY-VALVE  AND  THE  SWIMMING  AND 
LIFE-SAVING  TESTS 

1.  THE  NON-SWIMMER'S  SAFETY  VALVE. 

It   is    urged   that   the   safety   valve   be    copied   and   posted   at   every 
bathing  center,  as  it  will  greatly  minimize  the  needless  accidents  and 
fatalities  which  occur  through  ignorance. 
Don't  Venture  Beyond  Your  Depth. 

Don't  Raise  the  Arms  Above  the  Head,  as  this  Sinks  the  Body. 
(But  pull  for  the  shore,  using  the  alternate  arm  and  leg  motion,  or 

the  so-called  dog-paddle.) 
Don't  Get  Excited  when  in  Deep  Water,  but  Float. 
(That  is,  place  the  head  back  until   the  ears  are   covered,   chin   in, 
arms  in  side  horizontal  position,  and  if  necessary  use  an  alternate 
up  and  down  leg  kick.) 
Don't  Frantically  Clutch  Any  One,  but  Float  or  Signal  for  Help. 
Don't    Forget    that    you    can    Keep    Yourself    Afloat    by    Breathing 
Deeply  and  Treading  Water. 

(Use  an  alternate  up  and  down  leg  motion,  like  climbing  up  stairs, 
pushing  down  hard   against  the   water,   arms   to  side  horizontal 
position,  head  back.) 
Don't   Forget  That   Such   Object  as   an   Oar,   Log,   or   Clothes   will 
Help  Support  You. 

Don't  Forget  to  Signal  for  Help  When  in  Distress,  by  Repeatedly 
Raising  and  Lowering  the  Arm. 

Don't  Shout  for  Help,  but  Breathe  Deeply  and  Signal  by  Raising 
and  Lowering  the  Arm. 

Don't  Forget  to  Climb  Over  the  Stern  of  the  Boat.  Never  Over  the 
Side. 

2.  THE  SWIMMER'S  SAFETY  VALVE. 

Don't  I'^orget  to  bloat  or  Swim  on  the  Back  when  in  Danger  or 
Doubt. 

Dont'  Get  Excited  when  Seized  with  a  Cramp,  but  Moat,  or  Swim 
on  the  Back. 

Don't  b>antically  Raise  the  Arms  Above  the  Water,  but  Pull  for 
Shore. 

Don't  Get  Excited,  if  the  Body  is  Temporarily  Submerged.  Place 
the  Head  Back  and  Scull  to  Surface. 


146  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

Don't  Get  Excited  When  Clutched  by  Another,  but  Free  Yourself 
by  the  Release  Methods  Used  in  Life-Saving. 

Don't  Attempt  Long  Distance  Swimming  Unless  Accompanied  by 
Swimmers  or  Boat. 

Don't  Forget  when  Caught  in  a  Current  or  "Rip-Tide"  to  be  Calm, 
and  Swim  with  the  Current. 

Don't  Struggle  when  Caught  in  the  Undertow. 

(Recede  with  it  until  the  next  wave  is  met,  then  coast  in  on  it  or 
swim  with  it  or  the  following  ones.) 

Don't  Swim,  if  Suffering  from  Heart  Trouble,  without  Consulting  a 
Doctor. 

Don't  Attempt  Swimming  for  at  Least  One  Hour  After  Eating. 

Don't  Di^'e  Into  L'nknown  Waters,  but  Jump  Feet  First. 

Don't  Foolishly  Rock  a  Boat  or  Canoe,  or  Change  Seats. 

Don't  Forget  to  Signal  when  in  Distress,  by  Raising  and  Lowering 
the  Arm. 

Don't  Fail  to  Learn  the  Important  Release,  Rescue,  and  Resuscita- 
tion Methods. 

3.  THE  RESCUER'S  SAFETY  VALVE. 

Don't  Attempt  a  Rescue  Without  Some  Knowledge  of  Life-Saving. 

(It  may  mean  two  lives  instead  of  one.) 

Don't  Fail  to  Recognize  the  Signal  of  Distress. 

(As  victim  raising  and  lowering  the  arm,  body  disappearing  and 
reappearing,  etc.) 

Don't  Forget  to  Determine  Quickly  but  Calmly  the  Best  Alethod  of 
Rescue  and  Act  Accordingly. 

Don't  If  Possible,  Approach  Drowning  Victim  from  the  Front. 

Don't  Attempt  Release  by  "Knock-Out"  Measures,  it  May  Prove 
Fatal. 

Don't  k^orget  to  Alaintain  Hold  of  Victim  Immediately  After  the 
Break. 

Don't  Forget  to  Employ  the  Correct  Carry  Methods  and  Conserve 
Strength. 

Don't  I'^orget  to  Commence  Resuscitation  At  Once,  a  Few  Minutes 
May  Mean  the  Loss  of  a  Life. 

Important  Note.— The  signal  of  distress,  that  is,  the  repeated  raising 
and  lowering  of  one  arm,  should  be  universally  adopted  by  the  non- 
swimmer,  swimmer  and  rescuer.  Any  one  giving  this  signal  in  fun  should 
be  penalized. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


147 


THE  SHEFFIELD  SWIMMING  AND  LIFE-SAVING 

TEST 

The  object  of  this  test  is,  first,  to  stimulate  a  greater  interest  in 
swimming,  diving,  and  life-saving;  second,  to  emphasize  the  necessary- 
progression  in  learning  each  of  these  activities;  third,  to  standardize  swim- 
ming, diving,  and  life-saving. 

Leading  educators  realize  the  growing  demands  for  instruction  in 
swimming  and  life-saving  in  our  educational  institutions  and  also  the 
necessity  of  requiring  a  swimming  and  life-saving  test  as  one  of  the 
graduation  requirements. 

The  following  test  is  arranged  to  meet  the  demands  of  schools,  clubs, 
and  playgrounds.  However,  the  application  of  the  test  depends  upon  the 
discretion  of  the  instructor  and  the  ability  of  the  swimmer. 

THE  BEGINNER'S  SWIMMING  TEST 


I  Maxi- 
i  mum 
I  Points 


Points 
Award- 
ed 


1.  Correct  rhythmic  breathing,  turning  and  submerging  face 

20  times    

2.  Face   submerge   floating ;    hold   second   position   five   sec- 

onds, and  regain  standing  position 

3.  Face   submerge  push-off,   15   feet;   regain  standing  posi- 

tion     

4.  True  floating ;  hold  position  five  seconds  ;  regain  stand- 

ing position    

5.  Side-push-off ;    regain    standing   position 

6.  Change  body  positions,  back,  side,  and  face 

7.  Back-push-off,  10  feet;  regain  standing  position 

8.  Advance    floating   positions',    arms    vertical,    on    neck,    at 

side 

9.  Swim  a  correct   elementary   back  stroke   or   preliminary 

crawl  20  yards,  if  possible  in  deep  water 

10.  Swim   the   correct    Sheffield   sculling   stroke   or   the    side 


I  3    ! 

I  1 

I  4    1 

I  I 


Stroke  20  yards. 

if  possible  in  deep  water 

1    4  1 

Total    .... 

1      7.^     1 

THE  INTERMEDIATE  SWIMMING  TEST 


1.  Swim  a  correct  side  stroke,  25  yards |  5 

2.  Swim  a  correct  single  over-arm-side  stroke,  25  yards.  .  .  .j  5 

3.  Swim  the  trudgeon  with  a  correct  coordination,  25  yards|  5 

4.  Execute  part  one.  Rudiments  of  Diving [  4 

5.  Execute  part  two,  Elementary  Diving   I  6 


Total   25 


148 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


THE  ADVANCED  SWIMMING  TEST 


Maxi- 
mum 
Points 


1.  Swim  a  correct  trudgeon,  50  yards 

2.  Swim  a  correct  trudgeon  crawl,  50  yards 

3.  Swim  a  correct  crawl,  50  yards 

'-£§k-^  Swim   a  correct   alternate   racing  back   or   breast    stroke. 

50  yards   

5.  Execute  a  correct  racing  turn   

6.  Execute  a  plunge  for  distance,  35  feet  

7.  Execute    part    three,    Advanced    Diving — runnin-r    swan 

dive 

8.  Execute  part  three,  Advanced  Diving — back  dive 

Total    ; 

THE  LIFE-SAVING  TEST 

1.  Execute  motionless  floating  for  at  least  one  minute 

(If  one  is  unable  to  execute  horizontal  floating,  that  is 

if  the  body  displacement  is  heavier  than  water,  use  a 
sculling  arm  motion  or  crawl  kick). 

2.  Tread  water  for  at  least  two  minutes 

(If  desired  one  may  also  use  a  sculling  arm  motion.) 

3.  Dive   or  jump   from   a   five   or   ten-foot   platform,    swim 

25  yards.     Side  stroke,  upper  arm  held   in  carry  posi- 
tion   

4.  Execute  shallow  dive  and   swim  25  yards  on   the  back, 

arms  held  in  carry  position   

5.  Swim  25  yards,  dressed,  undress  and  continue  swimming 

50  yards    * 

(Wearing  apparel  should  consist  of  shoes,  waist  or  coat, 
skirt  or  trousers.) 

6.  Surface  Dive,  locating  and  recovering  object 

(1)  Swim  25  yards,  execute  surface  dive  in  deep  water 
and  bring  up  a  six-pound  object,  continue  swimming 
with  object  on  hip  10  yards. 

(2)  Execute  a  shallow  dive  and  swim  under  water  from 
10  to  30  feet. 

7.  Execute  the  following  breaks  while  in  deep  water 

(1)  Wrist  grasp. 

(2)  Front  neck  grasp. 

(3)  Body  grasp. 

(4)  Rear  neck  grasp. 


25 


SiriMMING  SIMPLIFIED 


149 


!  Maxi-    1  Points 
1   mum    1  Award- 
1  Points  1      ed 

8.  Execute  the  following  carry  methods  while  in  deep  water 

5 

(1)    Head  carry,  10  yards. 

(2)    Under  arm  carry.  10  yards. 

(3)    Side  chest  carry.  10  yards. 

(4)    Side  head  carry,  10  yards. 

(5)    Cramp  carry.  10  yards,  executed  with  trudgeon.  crawl 

or  breast  stroke. 

9.  Place  victim's  body  over  edge  of  pool  or  bank  prepara- 

tory to  resuscitation   

1 

10.  Execute    Schafer   method   of   resuscitation 

2 

Total    

25 

150  SIVIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

VIII 
WATER  SPORTS 

Water  sports  afford  a  varied  source  of  amusements,  and  also  stimulate 
greater  interest  in  swimming  and  life-saving.  A  series  of  games  have 
been  arranged  applicable  to  all  ages,  and  progressing  from  the  elementary 
team  games  to  the  advanced  sports  of  water  volley  ball,  baseball,  basket- 
ball and  water  polo.  In  addition  to  inter-class,  inter-scholastic,  club  and 
playground  competitions  in  swimming  and  life-saving,  contests  could  be 
held  in  any  of  the  elementary  team  games  listed,  thereby  offering  to  the 
majority  an  opportunity  for  organized  competitive  play. 


NOVELTY  RACES 
Umbrella  Race, 

The  contestants  possessing  open  umbrellas  or  other  objects,  line  up  in 
the  deep  water  end  of  the  pool.  At  a  signal,  the  swimmers  push  away  to 
the  opposite  side,  using  the  under-arm-side  stroke  and  carry  the  umbrella 
above  the  water.    The  first  swimmer  arriving  at  the  finish  wins. 

This  novelty  race  is  of  value  because  it  employs  the  side  carry  used  in 
life-saving. 

Candlestick  Race. 

The  participants  line  up  about  the  deep  water  end  of  the  pool,  robed  in 
night  dresses  and  caps.  At  a  signal,  participants  dive  into  the  water,  swim 
to  the  opposite  side  of  the  pool  where  candles  and  matches  have  been 
placed.  The  swimmers  quickly  light  their  candles  and  swim  back,  holding 
them  out  of  the  water  with  both  hands.  The  first  swimmer  to  reach  the 
starting  place  with  the  lighted  candle  wins. 

This  novelty  race  employs  the  back  stroke  carry  used  in  life-saving. 

Disrobing  Race. 

The  swimmers  line-up  at  the  deep  water  end  of  the  pool  dressed  in  old 
clothes  consisting  of  waist  or  coats,  skirts  or  trousers,  shoes  and  hats. 
At  a  signal,  participants  dive  into  the  water,  swim  twenty  yards,  disrobe, 
and  continue  swimming  at  least  twenty  yards  or  the  length  of  the  course. 

Life-Buoy  Race. 

The  contestants  sitting  in  life-buoy  arrange  themselves  at  the  starting 
place  in  the  deep  water  end  of  the  pool.    At  a  signal,  they  push  away,  and 


SirBfMINC  SIMPLIFIED  151 

propel  themselves  through  the  water,  using  a  paddle  motion  with  the  arms. 
The  first  swimmer  to  reach  the  finish  line  without  upsetting,  wins. 

Barrel  Race. 

Each  swimmer  strides  a  small  harrel  and  lines  up  at  the  deep  water  end 
of  the  pool.  At  a  signal,  the  contestants  paddle  and  kick.  Any  one  tipping 
over  must  mount  the  barrel  and  continue  paddling  to  the  finish  line. 

Tub  Race. 

Contestants  hold  on  to  the  edge  of  the  pool  and  assume  a  sitting  posi- 
tion in  the  tub.  At  a  signal,  they  propel  themselves  forward  by  a  paddling 
or  scooping  arm  motion.  If  the  swimmer  tips  over  he  must  right  himself 
and  continue  swimming  to  the  finish. 

Obstacle  Race. 

The  swimmers  line  up  and  at  a  signal  dive  into  the  water  and  swim 
fifty  yards,  going  over  or  through  the  various  obstacles  placed  in  the 
course,  such  as  life-buoys,  barrels,  hoops,  turning  somersaults  over  a  rope, 
etc. 

Spoon  and  Peanut  Race. 

The  participants  hold  on  to  the  edge  of  the  pool,  place  the  handle  of 
the  spoon  between  the  teeth,  with  a  peanut  in  the  spoon.  The  first  to  reach 
the  finish  with  the  peanut  in  the  spoon,  wins.  Swinnners  losing  their 
peanuts  are  disc|ualified. 

Duck  Chase. 

Place  a  duck  in  the  pool  al)out  twenty-five  yards  from  the  line-up.  At 
a  signal,  swimmers  dive  in  and  attempt  to  catch  the  duck. 


RELAYS 

The  Seal  Stroke  or  Dog  Paddle  Relay  for  Children. 

For  this  relay  the  participants  are  divided  into  four  equal  groups. 
Groups  A  and  C  are  lined  up  on  one  side  of  the  tank,  groups  B  and  D  are 
lined  up  on  the  opposite  side.  Groups  A  and  B  comprise  one  team,  compet- 
ing against  groups  C  and  D.  At  a  signal,  the  first  contestants  of  groups  A 
and  C  enter  the  water,  swim  to  the  opposite  side  of  the  tank.  Upon  touch- 
ing the  side,  leaders  of  the  groups  B  and  D  enter  the  water  and  swim  to 
groups  A  and  C.    When  a  contestant  touches  the  opposite  side,  he  should 


152  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

climb  out  and  go  to  the  end  of  the  line.  Tiie  swimming  continues  until  all 
of  the  contestants  of  groups  A  and  C  have  changed  places  with  those  of 
groups  B  and  D.  The  two  groups  or  teams  which  complete  the  exchange 
of  places  first,  win.  Any  number  of  groups  may  be  formed,  depending 
upon  the  number  of  players. 

Simple  Relay. 

The  simple  relay  is  the  same  as  the  preceding  one  except  that  speed 
strokes  are  substituted  for  the  Seal  Stroke  or  Dog  Paddle. 

Touch  and  Turn  Relay. 

For  this  relay  the  contestants  are  formed  in  four  (or  more)  equal 
groups,  lined  up  on  one  side  of  the  tank.  At  a  signal,  number  one  of 
groui :s  A,  B,  C,  and  D  enter  the  water,  swim  to  the  opposite  side  and  re- 
turn. As  soon  as  number  one  of  each  group  touches  the  side  of  the  tank, 
number  two  dives  into  the  water.  Number  one  then  jumps  out  and  goes 
to  the  end  of  the  line.  The  team  wins  whose  last  contestant  touches  the 
starting  place  first. 

Varied  Stroke  Relay. 

This  relay  is  similar  to  the  preceding  one  except  that  two  or  more 
different  strokes  are  used  during  the  swimmer's  course. 


GAMES 
Cross  Tag. 

The  one  who  is  "it"  starts  the  game  by  naming  a  player,  then  swims 
after  him  until  he  is  tagged,  or  until  some  other  player  swims  between  the 
person  who  is  "it"  and  the  one  who  is  being  chased.  When  this  occurs,  the 
one  who  is  "it"  must  pursue  the  one  who  crossed  between  them.  If  the 
one  pursued  is  caught  before  another  player  recrosses  his  path,  he  be- 
comes "it,"  and  the  game  continues. 

Ball  Tag. 

Swimmers  may  play  in  either  the  shallow  or  deep  water  end  of  the 
pool.  The  one  who  is  "it"  starts  the  game  by  throwing  the  ball,  attempt- 
ing to  hit  one  of  the  players. 

The  player  who  is  hit  by  the  ball  in  turn  becomes  "it."  Players  may 
walk,  swim  or  dive  in  the  water  to  avoid  being  hit. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  153 

Hold  Tag. 

This  game  may  be  played  in  either  the  shallow  or  deep  water  end  of 
the  pool.  The  one  who  is  "it"  walks  or  swims  after  the  players,  -attempt- 
ing to  tag  them.  The  player  tagged,  must  place  the  left  hand  on  the  spot 
where  he  was  touched  and  holding  this  position,  attempt  to  tag  some  one 
else. 

Third  Frog  in  the  Puddle. 

Players  form  in  a  double  circle,  couples  facing  each  other  in  the  shal- 
low end  of  the  pool,  then  choose  one  of  the  players  to  be  "it,"  and  one  to 
be  chased.  The  one  that  is  to  be  chased  may  walk  or  swim  around  or  be- 
tween the  players,  and  is  free  from  being  tagged  when  he  stands  between 
the  two  players  of  any  couple,  and  then  the  one  who  is  "it"  must  attempt 
to  tag  the  one  towards  whom  the  chased  player  turned  his  back.  The  one 
who  is  tagged  becomes  "it,"  and  should  tag  the  one  who  caught  him  if 
possible.    Short  and  quick  changes  are  necessary  to  make  the  game  exciting. 

Follow  the  Leader. 

The  players  choose  a  leader,  who  performs  a  series  of  stunts.  The 
rest  of  the  players  must  imitate  the  leader.  When  one  of  the  players  fails 
to  perform  the  stunt  given,  he  must  drop  out.  The  game  continues  until 
the  leader  has  executed  all  of  his  stunts,  then  a  new  leader  is  chosen. 

Take  Away. 

The  swimmers  choose  sides  and  may  play  in  the  shallow  or  deep  water 
end  of  the  pool.  The  object  of  the  game  is  for  one  side  to  take  the  ball 
away  from  the  other. 

Fox  and  Ducks. 

Choose  a  player  to  be  the  fox,  another  to  be  the  mother  duck.  The 
other  players  are  little  ducks  which  form  in  a  line  behind  the  mother  duck, 
each  one  holding  the  waist  of  the  one  in  front  of  him.  The  fox  attempts 
to  catch  the  last  duck.  The  line  led  by  the  mother  duck  turns  in  various 
ways  to  protect  the  last  little  duck  from  being  caught  by  the  fox.  When 
the  last  duck  is  tagged  he  becomes  fox  and  the  fox  becomes  the  mother 
duck. 

Neptune's  Call. 

This  game  may  be  played  in  the  deep  or  shallow  end  of  the  pool,  with 
the  players  lined  up  on  one  or  both  sides.     The  one  who  is  "it"  stands  or 


154  SHIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

treads  water  in  the  center  of  the  pool.  When  he  shouts,  "Neptune's  call, 
come  one  and  all,"  the  players  must  swim  to  the  opposite  side,  and  he 
tries  to  tag  as  many  as  he  can.  All  of  the  players  that  are  tagged  must  re- 
main in  the  center  and  assist  in  capturing  the  others  until  all  are  caught. 
The  player  who  was  caught  first  is  "it"  for  the  next  game. 

Dodge  Ball. 

The  players  choose  sides.  Group  one  forms  a  large  circle  around 
group  two  in  the  shallow  end  of  the  pool.  The  outside  circle  has  one  or 
two  volley  or  water  polo  balls,  with  which  they  attempt  to  hit  the  players. 
The  players  within  the  circle  may  walk,  swim  or  duck  under  the  water  to 
avoid  being  hit.  As  soon  as  a  player  is  hit  with  the  ball  he  must  join  the 
circle  and  assist  in  hitting  the  players  within  the  circle.  When  all  have 
been  hit  the  groups  change  places  and  repeat.  The  last  two  players  who 
were  hit  in  the  two  games  are  captains  to  choose  up  for  the  next  contest. 

Bat  Ball. 

This  game  may  be  played  in  the  shallow  or  deep  water.  Alark  a  home 
base  at  one  end  of  the  pool,  and  mark  a  second  base  about  40  feet  away. 
The  players  form  in  two  equal  teams,  one  at  bat  behind  the  home  base 
line  and  the  other  covering  the  field  as  completely  as  possible.  A  volley 
or  water  polo  ball  is  used.  The  batter  tosses  the  ball  up  and  bats  it  with 
his  hst.  W'hen  a  fair  ball  is  hit,  that  is  in  the  playing  space,  and  in  front  of 
the  home  base  line,  the  batter  must  swim  to  the  pole  or  second  base  and 
return  to  the  home  base  line.  Fielders  try  to  put  the  runner  out  by  hitting 
him  with  the  ball  or  catching  a  fly  ball,  but  they  must  not  swim  with  the 
ball,  they  must  pass  it  to  other  fielders  who  are  near  the  batter.  When  a 
fielder  swims  with  the  ball  the  opposing  side  is  awarded  a  point.  A  point 
is  also  made  after  the  batter  touches  second  base  and  returns  to  home  base 
without  being  hit.  Batters  are  permitted  to  duck  under  water  to  avoid 
being  hit.    Fielders  and  batters  change  places  when  three  outs  are  made. 

Punch  Ball. 

Alark  out  a  small  baseball  diamond  in  the  shallow  end  of  the  pool  or 
use  stationary  floats  for  bases. 

Choose  two  teams  of  nine  or  ten  players  each,  as  in  baseball,  and  have 
one  team  at  bat  and  the  other  in  the  field.  The  catcher  stands  opposite 
the  batter  and  must  toss  the  ball  up  above  the  batter's  head ;  as  the  ball 
comes  down,  the  batter  hits  it  with  his  fist,  then  swims  to  first  base,  if  the 
ball  hits  inside  the  diamond.     The  fielders  catch  the  ball  on  the  fly,  or 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  155 

get  it  as  (inickly  as  possible  and  return  it  to  tlie  catcher.  If  the  catcher  is 
standing  in  his  position  and  has  the  hall  in  his  hand  while  a  baseman  is 
walking  or  swimming  between  bases,  the  l)ase  rnnner  is  ont.  The  basemen 
are  not  permitted  to  advance  from  a  base  until  the  batter  hits  a  fair  ball. 
A  run  is  scored  when  the  batter  touches  first,  second,  third  and  home 
bases.     Batters  and  fielders  change  places  when  three  outs  are  made. 

Over  the  Top. 

This  game  should  be  played  in  the  shallow  end  of  the  pool  and  in  a 
space  with  definite  boundaries.  Stretch  a  rope  or  net  across  the  playing 
space  about  four  feet  above  the  water.  Two  captains  choose  their  teams 
of  equal  numbers.  The  teams  line  up  one  at  each  side  of  the  rope  or  net. 
The  object  of  the  game  is  to  throw  the  ball  over  the  rope  so  it  will  strike 
the  water  in  the  opponents'  half  of  the  court.  The  opponents  try  to  catch 
the  ball  before  it  touches  the  water  and  throw  it  back.  If  the  ball  hits  the 
water  in  the  opponents'  territory,  it  is  a  score  for  the  side  throwing  it.  A 
foul  ball  is  one  that  hits  the  rope  (or  net),  goes  under  the  rope,  or  is 
thrown  outside  of  the  opponents'  court  in  any  direction,  without  the  op- 
ponents touching  it.  A  foul  scores  a  point  for  the  other  side.  The  team 
having  the  largest  score  at  the  end  of  the  playing  time  wins  the  game. 
Over  the  Top  or  volley  ball  may  also  be  played  in  deep  water  with  the  rope 
or  net  four  feet  above  the  water  surface. 

Water  Volley  Ball. 

Stretch  a  rope  or  net  across  the  shallow  end  of  the  pool  and  about 
four  feet  above  the  water.  Players  form  in  tw^o  equal  groups  on  opposite 
sides  of  the  rope.  A  water-polo  or  volley  ball  is  used.  The  object  of  the 
game  is  to  bat  the  ball  over  the  rope  with  open  hands,  using  one  or  both 
hands.  One  player  starts  the  game  by  "serving,"  that  is,  he  stands  at  the 
back  of  the  court,  tosses  the  ball  up,  and  then  bats  it  upward  and  over 
the  net.  His  team  mates  watch  the  ball,  and  if  necessary  help  bat  it  over 
the  net,  but  no  player  is  allowed  to  bat  it  twice  in  succession.  If  the  ball 
goes  over  the  net  without  touching  it  must  be  batted  back  by  the  op- 
ponents. The  ball  is  in  play  as  long  as  it  is  batted  back  and  forth  across 
the  net.  The  ball  is  out  of  play  and  must  be  started  again  by  serving 
when  one  side  fails  to  return  it,  whether  by  letting  it  hit  the  water,  batting 
it  in  the  net  or  batting  it  outside  the  court.  The  side  failing  to  return  the 
ball  at  any  time  when  it  is  in  play  loses  a  point.  If  the  serving  side  loses  a 
point,  they  lose  the  right  to  serve,  and  the  ball  goes  to  the  opponents.  If 
the  other  side  loses  (serving  side  winning)  it  counts  one  score  for  the 
serving  side.  Only  the  serving  side  scores,  the  other  side  tries  to  win  the 
points   and   thus   earn  the  right  to   serve.     Fifteen   points   make  a   game, 


156  SJJ^IMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

unless  it  is  a  tie  finish,  or  fourteen  all ;  in  that  case  the  winning  side  must 
score  two  additional  points  over  the  opponent. 

Water  Base  Ball. 

Alark  out  a  small  baseball  diamond  in  the  shallow  or  deep  water  end 
of  the  pool-  or  use  stationary  floats  for  bases.  The  game  is  then  played 
according  to  indoor  baseball  rules,  except  that  a  water-polo,  volley  or  ten- 
nis ball  is  used,  and  the  batter  hits  the  ball  with  his  fist. 

Water  Basket  Ball. 

This  game  should  be  played  in  shallow  end  of  the  pool  and  according 
to  the  official  basket-ball  rules. 

Water-Polo. 

This  game  is  one  of  the  most  exciting  and  difficult  of  the  team  games. 
For  particulars  refer  to  the  official  water  polo  rules. 


sir IM MING  SIMPLIFIED  157 

IX 
SUGGESTIONS  TO  INSTRUCTORS 

The  object  of  Chapter  IX  is  to  simphfy  the  teaching  method  for  mass 
instruction.  A  few  suggestions  pertaining  to  the  exercises  and  drills  are 
given. 

Preliminary  Land  Drill. 

The  object  of  this  land  drill  is  to  line  up  the  class  about  the  pool, 
properly  spaced,  in  readiness  for  the  land  drill  that  is  to  be  given. 

Line-Up ! 

At  the  command  Line-Up !  arrange  the  class  in  any  number  of  straight 
lines  desired,  according  to  height,  depending  upon  the  size  of  the  class  and 
space  available. 

Arms  front  horizontal — Raise  ! 

Arms  side  horizontal — Raise  ! 

At  the  command  Raise!  have  the  class  adjust  their  distance  by  raising 
the  arms  to  front  horizontal  or  side  horizontal,  depending  upon  the  space 
needed  and  the  stroke  used. 

In  adjusting  the  distance  forward  raise  the  extended  arms  to  front 
horizontal  position,  shoulder  width  apart,  palms  facing  towards  each  other, 
chest  out,  head  up.  In  adjusting  the  distance  sideways,  raise  the  extended 
arms  to  side  horizontal  position,  palms  down. 

Arms — Position ! 

At  the  command  Position  !  have  the  class  quickly  bring  the  arms  down 
to  the  side  of  the  body. 

Class — Attention  ! 

At  the  command  Attention !  have  the  class  assume  the  best  possible 
standing  position ;  heels  together,  toes  turned  out  forming  an  angle  of 
about  thirty  degrees,  the  entire  bod)'^  erect  with  the  weight  forward  on 
the  balls  of  the  feet,  knees  extended,  abdomen  in,  chest  high,  head  erect, 
chin  in.  arms  and  hands  at  the  sides  of  the  body. 

Too  much  stress  cannot  be  laid  upon  the  necessity  of  giving  posture 
training  throughout  all  of  the  swimming  drills.  For  the  trained  teacher 
of  physical  education  it  is  merely  a  matter  of  a:)plication. 

In  place — Rest ! 

At  the  command  Rest!  have  the  class  place  the  left  foot  to  the  side, 
weight  on  both  feet.  This  serves  as  a  rest  position  while  the  instructor  is 
explaining  a  drill. 


158  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

Preliminary  Water  Drill. 

The  object  of  this  drill  is  to  line  up  the  class  around  the  edge  of  the 
pool,  properly  spaced,  in  readiness  for  whatever  drill  may  follow. 

Line-Up ! 

At  the  command  Line-Up  !  have  the  class  assume  a  correct  standing 
position  around  the  edge  of  the  pool. 

Arms  side  horizontal — Raise  ! 

Arms — Position  ! 

Diving  position — Take  ! 

At  the  command  Take !  have  the  class  assume  a  sitting,  kneeling  or 
standing  position,  as  the  case  may  demand  preparatory  to  entering 
the  water. 

Application  of  the  Preceding  Water  Drill. 

The  following  illustrates  how  the  preliminary  water  drill  can  be  ap- 
plied as  a  class  exercise  demonstrating  correct  breathing  for  beginners. 
A  similar  water  drill  may  be  worked  out  for  any  of  the  exercises  or  drills 
given  in  swimming  or  diving. 

Line-Up ! 

At  the  command  Line-Up !  have  the  class  assume  a  correct  standing 
position  around  the  edge  of  the  pool. 

Sitting  position- — Take  ! 

At  the  command  Take !  have  the  class  assume  a  correct  sitting  position 
around  the  edge  of  the  pool,  feet  placed  in  the  water  or  on  the  railing, 
extended  arms  covering  the  ears,  thumbs  locked,  chin  in,  body  bent  for- 
ward. 

Inhale ! 

At  the  command  Lihale !  have  the  class  take  a  deep  inhalation  through 
the  mouth,  then  close  it. 

Dive — In ! 

At  the  command  Dive — In  !  or  when  the  whistle  blows,  have  the  class 
enter  the  water,  submerging  the  entire  body. 

Railing — Grasp ! 

At  the  command  Grasp !  have  the  class  grasp  the  railing  or  side  of  the 
tank  by  means  of  the  overhand  grasp,  arms  extended,  shoulders  submerged. 

Starting  position  for  breathing — Take  ! 

At  the  command  Take !  have  the  class  assume  the  correct  starting  posi- 
tion for  breathing,  as  described  in  the  text. 

Inhale ! 

At  the  command  Inhale !  have  the  class  take  a  deep  inhalation  through 
the  mouth. 

Exhale ! 


SJl'IMMLXa  SIMPLIUIRD  159 

At  the  command  Exhale !  have  the  class  exhale  through  the  nose 
under  water.     Practice  this  exercise  until  it  is  perfected. 

THE  CORRECT  USAGE  OF  COMMANDS 

The  following  few  suggestions  as  to  how  to  give  commands  and  inter- 
pret the  text  wil  Iprove  helpful.  The  commands  are  necessary  in  mass 
instruction  as  a  means  of  securing  unified  efforts  and  quick  response. 

Most  commands  are  composed  of  three  parts;  as, 

(1)  The  descriptive  or  explanatory  part  which  should  inform  the  class 
of  what  is  to  be  done. 

(2)  Following  the  descriptive  part  should  come  a  pause,  in  order  that 
the  class  may  think  or  visualize  what  is  to  follow.  The  length  of  the 
pause  is  determined  by  the  simplicity  or  complexity  of  the  command  and 
the  rhythm  desired. 

(3)  The  executive  part  of  the  command  is  that  part  which  demands 
immediate  execution  or  implies  immediate  action. 

The  following  are  examples  of  each  of  the  above  described  parts  : 

(1)  Left  knee  upward — Bend! 

The. descriptive  part  of  this  command  is  Left  knee  upward;  this  gives 
the  class  an  idea  of  what  is  to  move  and  where.  There  are  a  few  excep- 
tions to  this  rule,  as  Line — Up  !  or  Class — Attention  !  Once  these  differ- 
ences are  explained,  it  will  not  prove  difficult. 

(2)  Left  knee  upward — Bend  ! 

The  pause  after  the  word  upward  should  be  long  enough  to  give  the 
class  a  chance  to  comprehend  what  has  been  said.  When  the  command 
Line-Up !  is  given  as  one  word,  it  implies  the  descriptive  and  executive 
part  of  the  command.  Usually  a  whistle  is  blown  first  to  command  silence 
and  attention,  then  the  command  Line-Up !  is  given,  and  is  executed  at 
once. 

(3)  The  executive  part  of  the  command  indicates  when  the  exercise 
shall  take  place.     It  may  be  formed  in  either  of  two  ways  : 

First,  the  verb  may  be  used  at  the  end  of  the  command;  as — Left 
knee  upward — Bend! 

Second,  the  verb  may  be  placed  at  the  beginning  of  the  descriptive  part 
of  the  command  and  the  numbers  One!  or  Two!  etc..  used  as  an  execu- 
tive part;  as — Bend  left  knee  upward — One!  When  the  latter  is  used  the 
instructor  should  not  repeat  the  descriptive  part  of  the  command  but 
substitute  the  word  One !  Two  !  etc. 

The  following  suggestions  regarding  the  importance  of  the  voice  in 
giving  commands  cannot  be  over  emphasized.     The  descriptive  part  of  the 


160  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

command  must  be  enunciated  clearly  in  order  that  the  class  may  hear,  and 
in  about  the  same  tempo  as  ordinary  conversation. 

The  time  or  length  of  the  pause  varies  with  the  simplicity  or  complexity 
of  the  exercise  and  the  rhythm  desired. 

The  command  of  execution  should  be  given  in  varied  quality,  intensity, 
and  inflection  of  voice,  depending  upon  the  exercise.  A  quick  movement 
would  demand  a  short,  snappy  command  of  execution,  ending  with  a 
somewhat  rising  inflection  of  voice.  A  slow  movement  would  demand  a 
slow  command  of  execution,  ending  with  a  somewhat  falling  inflection  of 
voice.  Thus  it  is  noticed  that  the  rhythm  of  a  command  is  indicated  by 
the  voice.     The  elementary  back  stroke  is  used  to  illustrate. 

Up  easily,  inhale — One! 

Out  easily,  inhale — Two  ! 

The  commands  of  execution  of  One!  and  Two!  should  be  given  slowly 
and  with  a  falling  inflection  of  the  voice. 

Down  forcibly,  exhale — Three  ! 

The  command  of  execution  Three!  should  be  given  quickly  and  with  a 
rising  inflection  of  the  voice. 

Hold,  exhale — Fourth  ! 


THE  METHOD  OF  PROCEDURE  IN  LEARNING  OR 
TEACPHNG  SWIMMING 

In  teaching  children  make  their  swimming,  imitative  story  play.  By 
this  method  the  child  will  unconsciously  overcome  the  fear  of  the  water 
and  learn  to  swim  through  play. 

THE  BEGINNER'S  FIRST  LESSONS 

1.  First  Steps  in  Overcoming  the  Fear  of  Water. 

2.  Learning  to  Breathe  Correctly. 

The  land  drills  for  overcoming  the  fear  of  the  water  and  learning  to 
breathe  correctly  require  home  practice  until  they  are  perfected.  Before 
assigning  these  exercises  to  the  class,  the  instructor  should  illustrate,  using 
a  bowl  of  water. 

3.  Body  Balance. 

Exercise  1.    Face-Submerged-Floating — First  Position. 

When  a  railing  is  not  available  in  the  pool,  lake  or  river,  execute  this 
drill  in  shallow  water,  pupils  facing  towards  the  shore  or  shallow  end  of 
the  tank  and  with  the  hands  on  the  bottom. 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  161 

Exercise  4.    Face-Submerged-Floating — Second  Position. 

The  instructor  should  emphasize  the  importance  of  this  drill  as  a 
means  of  proving  the  natural  body  buoyancy  when  the  lungs  are  inflated 
and  the  head  is  submerged.  This  is  one  of  the  most  important  means  of 
inspiring  the  beginner  with  confidence. 

If  horizontal  floating  proves  difficult,  have  the  individual  assume 
sitting  position  bp  grasping  the  knees,  then  take  a  deep  breath,  and  sub- 
merge the  face. 

Exercise  5.    Face-Submerged-Push-Off. 

Having  learned  the  preceding  drills,  too  much  stress  cannot  be  laid 
upon  this  exercise,  for  it  is  really  the  first  attempt  in  learning  to  swim, 
that  is  the  body  in  motion.  If  one  is  teaching  in  a  lake,  river,  or  pool 
without  a  railing,  secure  a  firm  footing  on  the  bottom  of  the  pool,  pre- 
paratory to  the  push-off.  Then  push  away,  gliding  forward  towards  the 
shore. 

If  after  two  or  three  attempts  the  majority  of  the  class  are  timid  in 
executing  this  drill,  have  the  class  assume  correct  starting  position,  and 
number  off  in  twos.  Number  ones  take  eight  steps  forward,  about  face. 
Number  twos  assume  a  starting,  position  for  the  push-off.  Upon  the  com- 
mand or  signal,  number  twos  push  away,  and  number  ones  stand  by  to 
assist  when  necessary.  Then  reverse  the  order.  This  will  often  instill  the 
novice  with  greater  confidence. 

Exercise  8.   Attaining  Standing  Position  from  True  Floating. 

If  part  of  the  class  finds  difficulty  in  executing  exercise  eight,  the  fol- 
lowing suggestions  will  prove  helpful :  Have  the  class  number  off  in  twos. 
Number  ones  assume  the  starting  position  for  this  drill ;  number  twos 
stand  at  the  side  of  number  ones  ready  to  give  assistance  in  forcing  the 
head  forward  to  the  face  submerged  position  only  when  needed.  Then 
reverse  the  order. 

Exercise  9.    True  Floating — Second  Position. 

The  instructor  should  emphasize  the  importance  of  this  drill  as  a 
means  of  acquiring  body  balance  while  on  the  back,  which  is  true  floating. 

Those  who  find  floating  difficult,  and  especially  men  whose  body  dis- 
placement is  heavier  than  water,  should  use  either  of  the  following 
methods  : 

e 

(1)  Raise  the  arms  to  vertical  position,  back  of  hands  resting  on  water 
surface. 

(2)  If  this  is  not  sufficient,  use  an  alternate  up  and  down  crawl  kick. 

(3)  Or  use  a  sculling  arm  motion. 


162  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

Exercise  11.    Changing  Body  Positions. 

This  exercise  is  a  means  of  inspiring  the  beginner  with  confidence  when 
required  to  pass  the  deep  water  swirr'ming  test.  It  is  often  necessary  to 
change  from  one  position  to  the  other  when  swimming. 

It  will  be  found  helpful  in  teaching  a  large  class  in  a  limited  space  to 
have  them  number  off  by  twos.  Number  ones  assume  the  face-submerged 
push-off  position ;  inhale,  submerge  the  face ;  glide ;  then  turn  over  on  the 
back;  hold  this  position  for  at  least  five  counts.  While  number  ones  are 
doing  this,  number  twos  should  assume  the  correct  starting  position,  then 
as  number  twos  push  off,  number  ones  will  return  to  their  places  and 
repeat  the  drill  if  necessary.  This  might  be  utilized  for  all  of  the  body 
changes. 

Exercise  12.  Back-push-off. 

Refer  to  the  instructor's  note  given  under  exercise  five  and  if  neces- 
sary apply  it  to  this  drill. 


ANALYSIS  OF  THE  VARIOUS  SWIMAIING  STROKES. 

These  general  suggestions  which  apply  to  all  strokes  will  aid  the  in- 
structor in  class  management : 

(1)  Follow  carefully  the  progressive  steps  for  teaching  and  learning 
the  stroke  which  precede  each  lesson. 

(2)  During  the  water  drills  have  the  class  assume  the  correct  start- 
ing position,  properly  spaced  about  the  pool,  in  order  that  each  pupil  may 
have  ample  room  to  execute  the  drill.  For  large  classes  with  a  limited 
water  space,  have  the  class  practice  the  water  drills  swimming  in  their 
line  of  direction;     that  is  always  keeping  to  their  right. 

(3)  The  motion  picture  land  drill  conveys  the  idea  of  swimming;  that 
is,  the  body  in  motion.  It  also  emphasizes  the  pull  drive  which  is  the 
propelling  power  of  the  stroke. 


THE  ELEMENTARY   BACK  STROKE 

Before  permitting  the  class  to  swim  with  the  arms  alone,  review  exer- 
cises ten  and  thirteen  of  Chapter  11.  Before  permitting  the  novice  to 
take  the  deep  water  test  in  the  back  stroke  the  following  precautions  are 
necessary, 

(1)  Swim  across  the  shallow  end  of  the  pool  using  a  correct  arm 
motion. 


S IV I M AUNG  SIMPLIFIED  163 

(2)  Swim  across  the  shallow  end  of  the  pool  using  a  correct  leg 
motion. 

(3)  Swim  across  the  shallow  end  of  the  pool  using  a  correct  arm  and 
leg  motion. 

(4)  After  swimming  across  the  width  of  the  pool,  have  the  student 
grasp  the  railing  with  one  hand,  about  face,  assume  the  back  push-off 
position,  and  continue  swimming. 


THE  SHEFFIELD  SCULLING  STROKE 

The  mastery  of  this  stroke  inspires  the  beginner  with  greater  con- 
fidence and  is  another  means  of  resting  the  body.  In  teaching  the  scull- 
ing stroke  have  the  class  swim  across  the  shallow  end  of  the  pool,  arms 
alone,  legs  alone,  and  then  the  combination. 

Then  have  the  class  start  from  the  back-push-off  and  practice  swim- 
ming across  the  shallow  end  of  the  pool  with  two  elementary  back  strokes 
and  alternate  with  two  Sheffield  sculling  strokes.  Also  try  out  various 
combinations  of  both  strokes.  After  practicing  these  two  strokes  as  de- 
scribed above,  the  novice  is  prepared  to  take  the  deep  water  test  with 
absolute  safety  and  confidence.  As  an  emergency  measure  warn  the 
beginner  before  taking  the  deep  water  test  to  float  or  scull,  if  he 
becomes  exhausted  or  frightened;  or  to  sv^'-im  either  stroke,  arms  and 
legs  alone  or  the  combination.  Also  warn  the  beginner  against  raising 
the  arms  above  the  water  as  this  tends  to  sink  the  body.  And  in  case  the 
body  is  temporarily  submerged,  one  will  come  to  surface  by  placing  the 
arms  in  the  side  horizontal  position,  and  pressing  the  head  back,  chin  in. 
Or  if  one  does  not  float  easily,  to  hasten  coming  to  the  surface,  push  off 
the  bottom  or  use  a  sculling  arm  motion,  pushing  down  hard  against  the 
water,  head  low. 


THE  UNDER-ARM-SIDE  STROKE 

Emphasize  the  importance  of  the  side-push-off  as  a  means  of  learning 
to  balance  and  control  the  body  in  the  side  position.  Chapter  II.  Exer- 
cise ten.  The  further  advantage  of  learning  the  back  strokes  previous  to 
the  side  stroke  is,  that  it  aids  the  novice  in  taking  the  side  stroke  deep 
water  test,  and  the  change  from  the  back  to  the  side  is  very  slight.  As 
a  safety-first  measure  preparatory  to  taking  the  deep  water  test,  have  the 
novice  pass  this  test  in  shallow  water.    Start  from  the  side-push-off ;  swim 


164  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

a  few  strokes  on  the  side ;  then  change  the  body  position  and  swim  a  few 
strokes  on  the  back ;  again  return  to  the  side  position  and  finish,  swim- 
ming a  few  strokes  on  the  side. 


SINGLE-OVER-ARM-SIDE  STROKE 

It  is  well  to  caution  the  class  alwaj's  to  keep  the  hand  of  the  recover- 
ing and  relaxed  upper  arm  close  to  the  water,  and  not  to  start  the  pull 
until  a  correct  catch  position  is  assumed.  This  will  make  it  much  easier 
to  perfect  the  stroke.  Also  follow  carefully  the  progressive  steps  in  learn- 
ing or  teaching  the  strokes. 


THE  DOUBLE-OVER-ARM   OR  TRUDGEON   STROKE 

Carefully  follow  the  text  in  all  details,  paying  particular  attention  to 
the  correct  timing  of  the  inhalations,  also  the  correct  coordination  of  the 
stroke. 

It  has  been  found  helpful  for  the  novice  in  learning  the  double  over 
arm  recovery  to  slightly  depress  the  shoulder  of  the  pulling  arm,  which 
elevates  the  shoulder  of  the  recovering  arm.  This  method  requires  a  less 
expenditure  of  energy  during  the  recovery,  thereby  diminishing  fatigue, 
aids  one  in  acquiring  the  correct  stroke,  and  at  the  same  time  it  does  not 
noticeably  increase  the  resistance. 


THE  TRUDGEON  CRAWL 

Emphasize  the  following  points:  (1)  Diminished  body  roll.  (2) 
Diminished  shoulder  depression.  (3)  Limit  the  scissor  kick  to  about 
eight  inches.  (4)  Intercept  the  scissor  kick  with  a  two  beat  crawl.  (5) 
Turn  the  head  slightly  to  the  left  for  the  inhalation. 


THE  PRELIMINARY   CRAWL 

If  one  is  teaching  children  or  individuals  desiring  to  learn  the  crawl 
first,  too  much  stress  cannot  be  laid  upon  the  importance  of  first  master- 
ing Chapter  II  as  a  means  of  inspiring  the  beginner  with  confidence  and 
learning  body  control. 

Do  not  try  to  make  the  stroke  technical,  simplify  as  much  as  possible. 
This  is  especially  necessary  for  children.    Insist  upon  a  noticeable  body 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  165 

roll,  wiiich  necessitates  the  correct  rhythm  for  the  leg  kick;  that  is,  while 
the  right  arm  is  pulling  the  left  leg  kicks  and  vice  versa. 

Teaching  the  crawl  with  the  surf-board  is  not  practical  for  class  work, 
but  is  an  excellent  method  of  proceedure  for  the  individual. 


THE  CRAWL 

In  teaching  the  crawl  emphasize  the  following  points:  (1)  a  slight 
body  roll.  (2)  Decrease  shoulder  depression.  (3)  During  the  inhalations 
the  head  should  be  turned  but  slightly  to  the  left;  and  during  the  exhal- 
ations the  face  should  be  submerged.  (4)  Warn  against  a  pronounced 
knee  and  ankle  flexion;  and  the  feet  coming  out  of  the  water.  (5)  Pay 
particular  attention  to  the  correct  timing  or  coordination  of  the  stroke. 


THE  RACING  BACK  STROKE 

In  teaching  the  racing  back  stroke  emphasize  the  position  of  the  arms 
during  the  catch,  pull,  and  recovery  of  the  stroke.  Also  caution  against 
noticeable  knee  and  ankle  flexions.  In  other  respects  this  stroke  is  like 
the  crawl. 


THE  BREAST  STROKE 

In  teaching  the  breast  stroke  emphasize  the  following  points:  (1) 
While  practicing  the  second  land  drill,  arm  motion,  it  is  not  necessary  to 
have  the  legs  extended  over  the  edge  of  the  pool.  (2)  Follow  very  care- 
fully the  progressive  steps  in  learning  or  teaching  the  stroke  as  given  in 
the  text.  (3)  While  learning  the  stroke  insist  upon  a  slight  hold  or  rest 
after  the  fourth  count.  (4)  For  racing  purposes  omit  the  hold  at  the 
end  of  the  fourth  count.  (5)  Warn  the  pupils  against  using  a  semi- 
scissor  kick  while  swimming  the  breast  stroke. 


THE  RACING  TURN 

In  executing  the  turn  correctly,  emphasize  the  importance  of  a  quick 
and  forcible  upper  arm  swing,  at  the  same  time,  scooping  forward  with 
the  under  arm  in  order  to  push  the  body  back  near  the  wall,  finishing  with 
arms  in  front  horizontal  position,  palms  down.     Then  quickly  push  away. 


166  SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED 

DIVING 

In  teaching  diving  to  the  novice  emphasize  the  following : 

(1)  Inspire  the  beginner  with  confidence. 

(2)  Follow  carefully  the  progression  given  in  Rudimentary  and  Ele- 
mentary Diving. 

(3)  Caution  the  beginner  to  keep  the  head  down  and  body  bent  for- 
ward until  the  body  is  submerged,  otherwise  a  fiat  dive  would  result. 

(4)  Insist  upon  the  beginners  executing  a  deep  dive  close  to  the  start- 
ing place. 

(5)  Warn  the  beginner  against  arching  the  back  quickly  when  coming 
to  surface,  as  a  severe  strain  may  result. 

The  following  suggestions  are  helpful  in  teaching  advanced  diving: 

(1)  Insist  upon  the  diver  getting  a  good  spring  thereby  gaining  the 
maximum  height. 

(2)  Insist  upon  correct  form  when  diving  for  the  start,  mid-air,  and 
finished  positions. 

(3)  A  land  spring  board  is  essential  in  teaching  the  novice  how  to 
work  the  board, 

(4)  As  a  practical  safety-first  measure,  the  suspended  harness  or  belt 
is  used  in  connection  with  the  land  spring  board  in  teaching  advanced 
diving.  This  suspended  harness  is  the  same  as  that  used  in  the  gymnasium 
for  that  purpose. 

LIFE-SAVING 

In  teaching  the  various  life-saving  drills  the  best  results  are  obtained 
by  having  the  class  practice  one  break  and  carry  method  at  a  time  and 
then  apply  it  in  the  water.  After  this  is  learned  proceed  to  the  next,  until 
all  are  mastered.  The  instructor  should  carefully  analyze  each  land  and 
water  drill,  and  discuss  its  application  in  an  actual  rescue.  In  giving  an 
efifective  and  realistic  demonstration  of  the  various  release  and  rescue 
methods  in  the  water  the  resuscitation  drill  need  not  come  until  after  the 
last  drill. 

THE   SWIAIMING  AND   LIFE-SAVINGS  TESTS 

The  application  of  the  swimming  and  life-saving  test  does  not  require 
that  the  instructor  follow  the  order  given.     Any  part  of  the  test  may  be 


SWIMMING  SIMPLIFIED  167 

passed   at   any  time  and   the   individual   awarded   accordingly.     However, 
it  is  urged  that  the  maximum  of  one  hundred  points  be  the  final  goal. 

As  a  means  of  stimulating  a  greater  interest  and  encouraging  each  boy 
and  girl  to  become  a  swimmer  and  life-saver,  awards  should  be  given. 
The  nature  of  the  honor  will  depend  upon  the  system  of  awards  used  in 
each  particular  school,  club,  or  playground.  It  is  suggested  that  the 
awards  be  graded  according  to  the  beginners,  intermediates,  advanced  and 
life-saving  test.  Those  passing  all  of  the  tests  should  be  given  the  highest 
award. 

WATER  SPORTS 

These  games  should  not  only  be  used  for  competitions,  but  may  be  used 
as  warming-up  exercises  and  as  a  means  of  stimulating  greater  interest 
in  swimming  through  play. 


1»042 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA   LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


REC 


„ia 


m 


HAY  0  6  1984 
OCTOT! 


AcuflJiYioa  m 


24139 


m 


'J 


I    3  1158  00390  6434 


\ 


